WBVF Series Elevator Manual-Ver2-20140923-2 PDF [PDF]
WBVF SERIES ELEVATOR MANUAL This manual is the property of Hyundai Elevator Co., Ltd. and is loaned subject to return u
65 0 10MB
![WBVF Series Elevator Manual-Ver2-20140923-2 PDF [PDF]](https://vdoc.tips/img/200x200/wbvf-series-elevator-manual-ver2-20140923-2-pdf.jpg)
- Author / Uploaded
- Iván Sulbaran
Datei wird geladen, bitte warten...
Zitiervorschau
WBVF SERIES ELEVATOR MANUAL
This manual is the property of Hyundai Elevator Co., Ltd. and is loaned subject to return upon demand. Contents of this publication shall not be reproduced in any form without written permission of Hyundai Elevator Co., Ltd.
WBVF SERIES ELEVATOR MANUAL
《TABLE OF CONTENTS》 A.
INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
B.
ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
C.
MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
D.
DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
E.
TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
-i-
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
Elevator Installation Manual For Electrical Parts
This manual is the property of Hyundai Elevator Co., Ltd. and is loaned subject to return upon demand. Contents of this publication should not be reproduced in any form without written permission of Hyundai Elevator Co., Ltd..
2.0 2014-05-30 1 / 95
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
REVISION NO.
ITEM
Specification
DATE
0
First Edition
2013.08.24
1
Edit the format
2013.11.05
2
Reorganization of the manual
2014.05.30
Manager
2.0 2014-05-30 2 / 95
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 3 / 95
Table of Contents Safety Information ............................................................................................................................. 6 1.
Introduction of WBVF System .................................................................................................... 7 1.1 WBVF Motor Control Block Diagram ....................................................................................... 7 1.2 WBVF Standard Controller Layout .......................................................................................... 8
2.
Preparations for Installation ..................................................................................................... 11 2.1 Machine Room Environment ................................................................................................. 11 2.2 Location of the Control Panel ................................................................................................ 11 2.3 Precautions for Installation .................................................................................................... 13 2.4 Check List before Installation ................................................................................................ 16
3.
Low Speed Test Drive .............................................................................................................. 18 3.1 Introductions of Machine Room Connection .......................................................................... 18 3.2 Process of Low Speed Test Drive ......................................................................................... 19 3.2.1 Line Connection .............................................................................................................. 19 3.2.2 Low Speed Test Drive ..................................................................................................... 20 3.2.3 Check List for Low Speed Test Drive .............................................................................. 21
4.
Hoist Way Cable Harness ........................................................................................................ 22 4.1 How to Connect Traveling Cable (T-Cable) ........................................................................... 22 4.2 Components of Hoist Way Cable Harness ............................................................................ 23 4.3 How to Connect Hoist Way Cable Harness ........................................................................... 25
5.
Inside/Outside CAR.................................................................................................................. 30 5.1 How to Install CAR Junction Box ........................................................................................... 30 5.2 How to Install Landing Device (Landing Control Device) ...................................................... 33 5.3 How to Install OPB ................................................................................................................ 36 5.3.1 OPB Connection Information .......................................................................................... 36 5.3.2 Cautions during the Connections between CAN Communication Boards ...................... 39 5.4 How to Set Hall Indicator Device ........................................................................................... 42 5.5 Other Matters for Setting ....................................................................................................... 42 5.5.1 Voice Synthesis Device Speaker Volume Adjustment .................................................... 42 5.5.2 Cautions during the Replacement of COP-30D Board.................................................... 42
WBVF
6.
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 4 / 95
Machine Room Harness........................................................................................................... 43 6.1 MCPU Connection ................................................................................................................. 43 6.1.1 Board Composition.......................................................................................................... 43 6.1.2 Connector Name ............................................................................................................. 44 6.1.3 Main Board Power Specification ..................................................................................... 45 6.1.4 Check Points after Supplying the Power ......................................................................... 45 6.2 SAF Board Connection .......................................................................................................... 46 6.2.1 SAF Board Composition.................................................................................................. 46 6.2.2 Connector Names ........................................................................................................... 47 6.3 USAF Board Connection ....................................................................................................... 48 6.3.1 USAF Board Composition ............................................................................................... 48 6.3.2 Connector Names ........................................................................................................... 49 6.4 UCMP Board Connection ...................................................................................................... 50 6.4.1 UCMP Board Composition .............................................................................................. 50 6.4.2 Connector Names ........................................................................................................... 51
7.
High Speed Test Drive ............................................................................................................. 52 7.1 Check List before High Speed Drive ..................................................................................... 52 7.1.1 Balance Work .................................................................................................................. 52 7.1.2 Door Operator work......................................................................................................... 52 7.1.3 Landing Control Operation Verification ........................................................................... 52 7.1.4 Final Limit Switch Operation Verification......................................................................... 52 7.2 How to Set the Initial Operation ............................................................................................. 53 7.3 How to Test High Speed Drive .............................................................................................. 55 7.3.1 How to Register Manual Call using HHT......................................................................... 58 7.3.2 How to Set Display Code for Each Floor using HHT ....................................................... 59 7.4 How to Set Load for Load Cell............................................................................................... 60 7.5 How to Set Hall Indicator ....................................................................................................... 62 7.5.1 Indicator Installation and Floor Input ............................................................................... 62 7.5.2 Hall Indicator Operation and Troubleshooting................................................................. 65 7.5.3 Verification of other Optional Functions .......................................................................... 65 7.5.4 Finish Work ..................................................................................................................... 65
Appendix A. VCON Board Manual .................................................................................................. 66 1. VCON Board Composition and Function ................................................................................. 67 2. VCON Board Connection ........................................................................................................ 68 Appendix B. Inverter Initial Start-Up Manual ................................................................................... 69 1. Synchronous Machine ............................................................................................................. 69
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 5 / 95
2. Induction Machine ................................................................................................................... 71 Appendix C. Description WBVF System Board .............................................................................. 72 1. Control Panel PC Board .......................................................................................................... 72 1.1 Main Board ......................................................................................................................... 72 1.2 SAF Board.......................................................................................................................... 74 1.3 USAF Board ....................................................................................................................... 75 1.4 UCMP Board ...................................................................................................................... 76 1.5 VCON Board ...................................................................................................................... 77 2. COP Panel Board .................................................................................................................... 78 2.1 COP-30D Board ................................................................................................................. 78 2.2 WCOP30 / WCOP62 Board ............................................................................................... 79 2.3 COP Load Connection and Voice Volume Adjustment ...................................................... 81 2.4 HPI / CPI Indicator ............................................................................................................. 83 3. Boarding Hall Indicator PC Board ............................................................................................ 85 3.1 HIP PC Board..................................................................................................................... 85 3.2 GH5 PC Board ................................................................................................................... 86 3.3 HIP/HPI/GH5 FIRE/PARKING SW Wiring ......................................................................... 87 3.4 How to Set HIP / HPI Floor ID (For GH5, use DIP SWITCH in the board) ......................... 88 4. CAR Junction Box PC Board ................................................................................................... 90 4.1 CTC Board ......................................................................................................................... 90 4.2 CTX Board ......................................................................................................................... 90
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 6 / 95
Safety Information IMPORTANT! READ SAFETY NOTE AND THIS PAGE CAREFULLY before installation •
When it comes to Installation and Commissioning, Person passing through training course and having a certification provided by Hyundai Elevator co., LTD. is qualified to make a procedure.
•
Wear safety devices
•
Check and remove unnecessary projected parts
•
Check the safety shelter plate installation at the floor side door part for the operation of the car
•
No one but the approved personnel is authorized to have access to elevator equipment and devices
•
Clean up and arrange the control board and elevator controller connecting wires. Stranded wires must be twisted before works to prevent SHORT CIRCUIT that may occur when sticking out from the terminal block.
•
Check if all controllers, field terminals and cable connectors are properly arranged and tightened or not
•
Check the location of Pin No.1 to prevent COMPONENTS DAMAGE, In case of connecting a flat cable connector. (The location of Pin No.1 is traceable by using the arrow mark of the connector or the red line of the cable).
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 7 / 95
1. Introduction of WBVF System WBVF system combines elevator control and motor drive control into One-Board, and applied 32bit ARM CORE for the MAIN Board for fast data processing performance. It has RTOS (Real Time Operation System) for real time control processing ability. It is based on high performance MCU processing speed to achieve the optimal comfort such as MULTI-PATTERN, direct landing, etc. It is designed to use HHT exclusive for WBVF for Elevator condition checking and data setting. Category
Specification
Model
Passenger, Passenger /Freight
Speed
30m/min ~ 150m/min
Floors
30 floors (Max. 62 floors)
Applied motor
Induction / Synchronizer (Geared, Gearless)
Inverter
General type / Regenerative type
Group Control
4 Cars (Max. 8 Cars) [Table 1.1 WBVF Applied Specification]
1.1 WBVF Motor Control Block Diagram
[Figure 1.1 Motor Control Block Diagram]
Remark
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
1.2 WBVF Standard Controller Layout
[Figure 1.2 Controller Layout]
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 8 / 95
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
[Figure 1.3 Picture of Control Panel 15kW]
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 9 / 95
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
[Figure 1.4 Control Panel Parts Layout 15kW/30kW]
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 10 / 95
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 11 / 95
2. Preparations for Installation IMPORTANT! READ SAFETY NOTE AND THIS PAGE CAREFULLY before installation 2.1 Machine Room Environment •
Machine room should have sufficient space for the work.
•
Machine room should have lights for the work. Adequate temperature for the machine room is 0℃~40℃. (For other conditions, install heater / air conditioner.) If it is not an adequate temperature, it may affect the lifetime of the parts.
•
The location of the machine room should be altitude 3,658m or less.
•
The humidity of the machine room should be 95% or less.
2.2 Location of the Control Panel •
Do not install the control panel where there is a vibration.
•
Do not install the control panel where there is a dangerous material.
•
Control panel should have the gap of minimum of 1m from obstacles or walls to secure minimum space for installation adjustment work. [Figure 2.1]
•
Install the control panel apart from windows so that it is not affected by temperature, wind direction, or water.
•
Install the control panel where there is little influence of RF (Radio Frequency).
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
[Figure 2.1 Exterior of CP in Machine Room]
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 12 / 95
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 13 / 95
2.3 Precautions for Installation •
CAR communication and hall communication are designed as CAN communication method, so you must thoroughly perform the grounding work in all required parts to prevent malfunction.
•
All connections have harnesses, so make sure to check the connector number during the insertion of the connectors and insert correctly in the designated positions to prevent malfunction and parts damage by contact defect, wrong insertion, etc.
•
Connect the jumper cable for installation
•
Connect Remote controller JIG for installation
•
Make sure to test E-STOP, UP/DOWN switch operation of the JIG before the work.
•
Make sure to remove the JIG, When the installation work is not performed The JIG for existing STVF5, STVF7, or other installation work cannot be used.
Do not touch the resistor box at the top of Control Panel to avoid electric shock by work tools, etc.as in [Figure 2.2], Danger to injury! Check a CAR junction box carefully embedded CTC board and CTX boards to avoid board damage by water leakage. [Figure 2.3] •
Use the fixing bracket at the bottom of Control Panel when you want to fix and adjust the height of Control Panel.
[Figure 2.2]
[Figure 2.3]
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 14 / 95
•
During the low speed operation for installation, Do not insert CAN communication line into MAIN Board. CN11 and CN12 in order to prevent CAN parts damage
•
If you need to connect CAN communication line connectors CN11 and CN12, insert the connector after turning the power OFF in order to prevent CAN parts damage)
•
Make sure to wire the inverter input power lines(R, S, and T), output power lines (U, V, W), damping resistance power lines (P, BK) and signal lines with long enough intervals.
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
Voice speaker and 3-way S/W should be connected from the top of CAR to the bottom of COP.
2.0 2014-05-30 15 / 95
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 16 / 95
2.4 Check List before Installation READ “Safety Note” in this manual carefully in advance Check List. First of all , the low speed operation should be completed since the work is performed according to WOS engineering method. Therefore, Check the following list before installation!
•
Check 3 phase power applying status and the usage of NFB with appropriate capacity/Building.
•
Install the locking device for the machine room to control the access of outsiders.
•
Prevent water leakage from window or ventilation window of the machine room.
1)
Check List for Machine Room
•
Check the Hoist / Traction Machine 9 Check problem with oil (check the type of geared oil and whether the amount is changed) 9 Check if the project specification and the CAR number matches.
•
Brake 9 Check the manual operation status of the brake part. 9 Check the spring adjustment value according to the capacity. 9 Check the status of foreign object and adjustment of the brake drum.
•
Control Panel Installation 9 Check the space for work at the front side. 9 Check the vertical and horizontal level and fixing parts of Control Panel. 9 Select the location considering the installation of the cable duct.
•
Governor 9 Check if the specification matches the governor installation status and speed. 9 During the work using WOS engineering method, make sure to install the governor.
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 17 / 95
2)
Check list of Hoist way
•
Counter weight: CWT 9 Acquire adequate amount of counter weights to prevent slipping. 9 Check amount of counter weights are excessive/insufficient or not
•
Hoist way 9 Check if there is an obstacle interfering with CAR frame and Counter weight frame. 9 Check the tightness and mounting status of each bolt. 9 Install the safety shelter plate at the floor door part to prevent safety accidents and product damage.
3)
Preparations for pit
•
Buffer 9 Check if the safety buffer is correctly installed and adequate amount of oil is inserted into oil buffer.
•
Check Projected Parts 9 For safety, check and remove unnecessary projected parts.
4)
Control Panel Inspection 9 Check if Control Panel is placed and fixed for the worker to perform adequately, The front part should have the gap of 1m or more with other obstacles) 9 Unwrap the cover of Control Panel and check if the mounting of each part is correct. 9 Check the status of the inserted connectors. (check wrong insertion, contact defect) 9 Check if the connector of the power part is sufficiently tightened. 9 Check if main power, motor capacity, NFB, inverter and reactor, brake resistance (WB200G/GT, WB210GT inverter have no reactor and brake resistance), etc. are mounted according to the specification. 9 The height of Control Panel can be adjusted with a separate bracket at the bottom, so use it if necessary.
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 18 / 95
3. Low Speed Test Drive 3.1 Introductions of Machine Room Connection All wirings should use pipes, and especially have thorough end part finishing works for the pipes.
[Figure 3.1 Machine Room Connections and Pipes (Independent Machine Room)] #1A ; Conduit and flex conduit for governor encoder. (When governor encoder connection flexible and pipe, governor encoder are applied) #1B ; Conduit and flex conduit for governor switch. (Governor switch connection flexible and pipe) #1C ; Conduit and flex conduit for machine encoder. (Motor encoder connection flexible and pipe) #1D ; Conduit and flex conduit for machine brake & blower motor. (Traction Machine brake and motor FAN connection flexible and pipe) #1E ; Conduit and flex conduit for machine motor. (Motor power line connection flexible and pipe) #1F ; Conduit for disconnect switch box. (Main power supply pipe) #1G ; Machine room duct. (Machine room cable duct) #1H ; Machine room duct stay box. (Machine room cable STAY box)
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 19 / 95
3.2 Process of Low Speed Test Drive 3.2.1 Line Connection 1)
Power Line Connection
•
Connect from U, V, and W connectors, which are inverter output parts, to the motor in the order, and use the ring connector in the motor connector part for sufficient tightening.
•
The lines generating noise such as power line and brake, motor thermal SW, etc. should be separated from the signal lines and have pipes and wiring work.) Be careful not to connect R, S, T power line to inverter U, V, W connectors, or line going to the motor to power input R, S, T connectors!
2)
Encoder connection
•
Connect correctly the cable coming from encoder to inverter connector.
•
If encoder connection is reversed, it may damage the encoder, so be careful.
•
Connect shield line directly to inverter PGM connector or shield connector.
3)
Motor Thermal Wiring (TH1, THC) :
•
Distinguishing Induction Motor from Synchronous Motor.
•
Wire the thermal or the thermistor on the motor terminal block correctly according to the electrical diagram.
4)
Brake connection
•
Refer to the electric diagram to connect brake coil and contact point, etc.
•
Connect brake connections.
•
Be careful not to reverse B3, B4 and BSP, BSC, BOP lines
•
(B3(TBMA-5), B4(TBMA-6) & BSP, BSC, BOP (TBMA-2, TBMA-3, TBMA-4))
•
Check if there is a problem in the brake open checking micro switch and brake voltage adjustment volume resistance (R1 in VCON Board) setting.
5)
Governor (GOV) connection
•
Make sure the governor is clean and connect the case grounding line so that there is no malfunction of the contact point by dust, etc. after completing the governor connection.
•
Rotate governor axis to check if there is any interference in the rotation.
6) Grounding work If the work is performed near the equipment with conductivity, electric shock due to negligence may cause injury or death, so thorough grounding work must be done, and precise grounding work must be done to prevent malfunction of the machine. 7)
Connect from building power connector box to control panel main power(R, S, T, and E).
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 20 / 95
3.2.2 Low Speed Test Drive During the installation work, for low speed operation, a separate installation remote controller JIG is used, and installation remote controller JIG is composed of Control Panel side remote controller JIG, CAR side remote controller JIG, and installation remote controller. (Purchased and equipped by the installation company) REFER TO DRAWING NO. HE000525 INSTALL REMOTE.
1) Jumper Connector Work Use the jumper connector enclosed in CONTROL PANEL such as safety circuit, door circuit, hoist way limit switch, safety switch, etc. to have jumper work on the SAF board to prepare for the low speed operation. REFER TO DRAWING NO. 20400532 INSTALL CABLE.
2) How to Test Low Speed Drive Low speed operation using T-Cable and hoist way pit cable installation remote controller JIG. ① Set the automatic/manual switch in the control panel to manual position. ② Insert UP/DOWN button contact point into the control panel CN-A1connector as a low speed operation method using installation remote controller. ③ Connect remote controller E-STOP contact point into the enclosed jumper connector CN_R.
y y
During the installation low speed operation, do not insert CAN communication line into MAIN Board CM10 and CM11 in order to prevent CAN parts damage Insert the connector after turning the power OFF in order to prevent CAN parts damage, If CAN communication line connector CM10 and CM11 connections are required.
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 21 / 95
3.2.3 Check List for Low Speed Test Drive •
Check if the status of all connections and jumper cables and mechanical status are correct.
•
Place the AUTO/INS switch in the control panel toward downside (INS) to make it a manual mode.
•
Press E.STOP switch in the control panel to make cut off safety line.
•
In normal condition, check and turn ON the power of the main power connector box. Check if there is a missing part in the jumper worked parts. Check if installation remote controller JIGs are correctly connected to installation remote controller, T-cable, and SAF Board. 9 Check if the remote controller connection works are done. 9 After supplying the power, take special caution for the electric shock.
9 9
•
Turn ON MAIN NFB located at the top left side of Control Panel.
•
Check if proper voltages are on each AC power and DC110V, DC24V.
•
Check if GS, DS, SA relays are energized in SAF board.
•
Connect HHT to the Main board to activate “installation manual operation mode”. [2]SYSTEM MENU → 1.FACTORY & FIELD → 2.FIELD MODE SET-UP menu Select “MANUAL DRIVE"
•
Set the data with HHT according to "Appendix B: Inverter Initial Start-Up Manual [For more information, refer to WBVF motor drive unit [Inverter] Manual]".
•
Press UP/DOWN button of the remote controller to check if the rotation direction of the main part matches the UP direction, and if it is reverse, connect one pair among U, V, W reversely to match the direction.
•
Check the operation of the brake, and perform electric and mechanical adjustment on the brake. (Appendix A: VCON board adjustment manual)
•
Perform UP/DOWN operation at the top of CAR with the remote controller at the top of CAR.
•
When working with equipment, Report and Repeat based on the car (e.x. Car up, Car down repeatedly says)
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 22 / 95
4. Hoist Way Cable Harness 4.1 How to Connect Traveling Cable (T-Cable) •
Due to the characteristics of this system, T-Cable does not go through the middle junction box (Hatch Junction BOX) in principle. Therefore, use T-Cable hanger to hoist way between the middle and the highest.
•
Take out one side of the T-Cable from the machine room through the machine room duct hall, and bring it to inside Control Panel along the machine room duct. At this time, the length from Control Panel duct hall to the end of the cable should be 2m or more.
•
Use the steel reinforcement of Ø10 or more mounted in the machine room duct to bind the cable, and firmly fix the cable to have no problem.
•
Install the cable hanger within 500mm from the highest part of the hoist way [Figure 4.1], and fix this T-Cable.
•
As lowering the T-Cable to the bottom part, install the cable hanger at OH+TR/2+500mm, and bind the cable once again at this position.
630mm
300mm±50mm
[Figure 4.1 Traveling Cable (T-Cable) Connection] •
While CAR is located at the lowest floor level, have the pit curvature margin of about 300mm±50 between the lowest part of the T-Cable from the pit floor and fix it to the cable hanger at the bottom of the CAR. At this time, the distance between the cable coming down and the cable going up should be at least 630mm.
WBVF •
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 23 / 95
Connect T-CABLE from the bottom of the CAR to harness inside OPB in the CAR, and firmly fix it with the bracket in OPB.
4.2 Components of Hoist Way Cable Harness 1)
Communication & Interlock Harness
•
Communication cable: sends the communication for hall indicator signal and button signal and DC24V power to the hall indicator board.
•
Interlock cable: It is the structure to directly connect from each floor interlock to already installed connectors.
•
Main line : Use 0.75SQ x 7core + 2SQ x 1core EVV cable. Branching line : ① Communication cable branching to each floor: 0.75SQ x 7core EVV cable. ② Interlock cable branching to each floor: 0.75SQ x 3core EVV cable.
2) Pit harness cable It is composed of pit switch signal, pit working light, and consent signal, and harness for bottom part end switch cable and interlock connection part, etc. 3) Final limit switch harness Top part switch is directly connected to Control Panel, and the bottom switch is taken out from the pit harness. 4) T-cable 30 core is used as a standard, and thoroughly perform grounding work at COP.
WBVF 5)
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
When the HPI is applied:
Connect HPI to hall call button in the call button box.
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 24 / 95
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 25 / 95
4.3 How to Connect Hoist Way Cable Harness •
Preparation and Verification Work 9 Check the number of floors or CAR marking to see if the cable harness specification precisely matches the site. 9 Check if there are sufficient cable ties to fix the harness in each floor hanger case. 9 Check if a bracket is prepared to fix on the wall of the highest part of the hoist way, and anchor or hill tee for fixing should be prepared. 9 Prepare other basic tools, etc. (Knife, nipper, driver, tape measure, long nose, etc.) When hoist way is narrow, Use the harness fixing bracket to fixing harness cable.
① Arrange the prepared cable harness to prevent tangling, put them on the top of the CAR, and transport them to the highest floor. ② Check the locations of the indicators and buttons ③ Fix the bracket at the highest part of the harness location using hill tee and anchor. This should be precisely installed at the location where cable goes down straight to the bottom. ④ Mark at 1m from the machine room floor as the bracket location. ⑤ Take out the starting part of the cable to the machine room through the hole of the cable duct. ⑥ Place the white part of the cable to be at position in article 3. ⑦ Insert all of the upper part into the duct hole through the bracket. ⑧ In the machine room, take out the cable came from the hoist way [Figure 4.2] to Control Panel through the duct, check if the length is sufficient, and have the worker at the hoist way to completely fix the cable using the fixing bracket. ⑨ Fix the communication line and interlock line at one fixing bracket. ⑩ At this time, also fix the top part Final limit switch cable to the fixing bracket, and connect to the connector taken out from the switch.
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 26 / 95
[Figure 4.2 Communication, Interlock Harness Cable] Pull down the cable by lowering the CAR to the location where the work at the highest floor hanger case part is easy. ⑫ Use the cable tie to firmly tie the cable harness to the hanger case. At this time, place the cable branching point at the top of the hanger case. ⑬ Fix the remaining cable at the top of the hanger case if the cable is long. ⑭ Connect the connector of interlock cable and the connector taken out from the highest floor interlock together at the branching point. Check if the internal pin is projected straight up during the connector connection, If it is bent, or if there is a curved part, be careful for the case of no connection due to the bending. HIP and HPI have different indicator button cable connections. [For HIP] •
The hall button is included inside HIP, so connect the button cable to CH2 of HIP board inside HIP itself, and connect the communication line to CH1 connector.
•
The grounding connector included in the communication line should be locked by the bottom part HIP fixing bolt.
•
HPI has a separate hall button, and has the material prepared for the cable (CH2 connector) from HPI to the hall button to be taken out from HPI itself, so insert this according to the connector of the UP/DN call button through the hall button box.
•
Connect the communication line to CH1 connector. Lock the grounding connector with the grounding bolt inside HPI box.
•
Connect CN_13 and CN_A2 connectors to CH1 connector of the highest floor HIP(HPI), and connect the end resistor to the lowest floor HIP(HPI) CH4 connector. (Installed in factory)
•
When end-resistor is not installed or installed not properly, cause a CAN communication failure.
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 27 / 95
⑰ When the connection between the communication line and the interlock harness cable or the button cable is completed, arrange the cable to prevent interference with door panel operation or CAR operation, operate CAR down to the next floor and stop CAR at the location for easy working, and repeat the above ⑦~⑨works. For the lowest floor, perform the following works. •
Interlock connection at the lowest floor Connect the 2 pin connector that came through the lowest floor interlock to the interlock connector taken out from the pit harness.
•
Communication line connection at the lowest floor For the lowest floor, insert the communication line came down from the lowest floor+1 to HIP or CH1 of HPI board, and insert the end connector into CH4.
•
If temporary monitoring panel is installed : Remove CH4 end resistor, and connect CAN-repeater to CH4. (End resistor is included inside CAN-repeater, so no separate end resistor is necessary) Work at the pit 9 Connect bottom part Final limit switch connector. 9 Connect the connector to be connected to the pit switch box.
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
CH1 CH2 CH4
UP 1
P24 CANH 6
CANL N24
P24 N24 UPI UPO DNI DNO
CH2
HIP: 150mm HPI : 4000mm DOWN
[Figure 4.3 Communication Cable and Button Connection (HIP)]
2.0 2014-05-30 28 / 95
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS [HPIHPI TYPE] TYPE
[HIP TYPE]
INTERLOCK
HIP TYPE
HPI INTERLOCK
INTERLOCK
BTN BOX
HIP
HPI INTERLOCK
INTERLOCK
BTN BOX
HIP
Hanger Case HPI INTERLOCK
INTERLOCK
BTN BOX
HIP
SERIAL HARNESS
1mr
HPI INTERLOCK
EVV 0.5SQ X 7C FROM BUTTON
BTN BOX
INTERLOCK
H-1.2MR= 1.8mr
HIP
PIT HARNESS PIT HARNESS
INTERLOCK HARNESS
SERIAL HARNESS INTERLOCK HARNESS
[Figure 4.4 Hoist Way Harness Connection Diagram]
2.0 2014-05-30 29 / 95
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
2.0 2014-05-30 30 / 95
5. Inside/Outside CAR WBVF system has combined door controller and CAR top BOX. CAR peripherals should be installed as follows.
5.1 How to Install CAR Junction Box ① Install the CAR junction box at the top of the CAR as in [Figure 5.1]. Install the CAR junction box for the worker at the hall side to be able to work manual/automatic, Light switch, E-STOP switches within 1m. (Install the CAR J.BOX in the direction where the front part of the switches can be seen.) ② CTX board is embedded in the CAR junction box, so you have to be careful not to damage the boards by water leakage. [Figure 2.3] ③ Connect CAR junction box and door motor and door encoder. ④ Perform the door adjustment by referring to a separate WBVF Door controller Manual. ⑤ Installation of the CAR junction box and connection of the peripheral devices The following installation work should be performed after turning OFF the main power of Control Panel. CAR junction box contains the circuit boards, extra fuse, installation jumpers, etc. at ship-out, so work with caution not to lose parts and not to damage the enclosed items during the installation. After completing the installation of the CAR junction box, connect the peripheral devices of the CAR with CTC board and CTX board. No.
Name
Description
No.
1
CTC
Car Top Controller
9
2
CTX
Car Top Extension
10
3
CJB
Car Junction Box
11
4
CPI
Car Positioned
12
5
COP
Car Operating Panel
13
6
M.COP
Main COP
14
7
S.COP
Sub COP
15
8
D.COP
Disable COP
Name
Description
CAN
Controller Area Network
[Table 5.1 CAR Junction Box Board terms]
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
[Figure 5.1 Connection Diagram near CAR Junction Box]
2.0 2014-05-30 31 / 95
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
2.0 2014-05-30 32 / 95
Devices
Connectors
Safety switch
CC5
Emergency exit switch
CC8
Compen chain switch
CC6
Gate switch 1
CC4
Gate switch 2
CC4B
Safety edge X 1
CC25
Safety edge X 2
CC25B
Safety lay power
CC23, CC23B
Safety lay X 1
CC24
Jumper if not applied
Safety lay X 2
CC24B
Jumper if not applied
CC24B
Jumper if multi beam is applied
CC24
For multi beam
CC16
Multi-beam adapter
Multi beam Landing sensor
CN_T3
Ventilation fan
CC17
Fluorescent light
CC18
CAN communication
CN_T9
COP
CN_T1
CAN communication(for CPI)
CN_T14
Door inverter power
CN_T2
Close limit S/W
CN8
Open limit S/W
CN7
UVW
CN12
Encoder
CN4
Speaker
CN_T31
Speaker volume adjustment signal
CC11
Emergency light power output
CC28
Emergency light power input
CC28B
Input Signal to Protect to be Jammed Finger
CN_T10
Remark
Jumper if not applied
Jumper if not applied
Jumper if not applied
[Table 5.2 CAR Junction Box Connection Parts]
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 33 / 95
5.2 How to Install Landing Device (Landing Control Device) 1) Landing device installation Install the landing device main unit at certain location at the top of the CAR using the bracket. At this time, considering the installation locations of the governor rope, Final limit switch, T-cable, etc., the landing device location should be decided to have no interference. [Figure 5.2] 2) Landing vane installation ① At the top of the CAR, install the landing vane to the rail on the part where the landing device main unit is located. ② Adjust the landing vane to pass the center part of the landing device sensor. ③ Place the CAR on any floor so that the car level hatch floor level to perfectly match ④ Install the landing vane to be at the center of the sensor of the landing device. ⑤ Install the landing vane with the same method in all the floors ⑥ Check if there is any interference and if the gap between the sensor part and the landing vane is uniform by operating the CAR through all the floors.
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
[Figure 5.2 Landing Control Device ASS’Y Mounting Diagram]
2.0 2014-05-30 34 / 95
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
[Figure 5.3 Landing Sensor]
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 35 / 95
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
5.3 How to Install OPB 5.3.1 OPB Connection Information 1)
Top Part of the CAR and OPB Main Connection Diagram
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 36 / 95
WBVF 2)
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
2.0 2014-05-30 37 / 95
Applied Boards and Buttons Board Type
Specification
Remark
COP-30D Board
COP Control Board
COP control board
CPI
Car Position IND(CAN type)
Same as the circuit board for Hall communication
OPB button
300Ω
Not compatible with Hall button
3) Main COP Installation and Connection In the main COP includes 『C1 cable』,『C2 cable』,『A1 cable』, 『A2 cable』and『CN_B1』. After installing the main COP, connect the connectors of each cable to SUB COP-30D, WCOP30, CTC Bd, and CTX Bd. Cable Name
Starting Point
Destination
SUB COP CAN communication cable (C2)
MAIN COP-30D Board
CN_C10
SUB COP-30D Board
CN_C10
DISABLE COP CAN communication cable (C1)
MAIN COP-30D Board
CN_C6
WCOP30 Board
CN_W1
LOAD SWITCH (A2)
MAIN COP-30D Board
CC26
LOAD SWITCH
COP-CJB cable (A1)
COP Panel
CN_B1
CTC Board, CTX Board
4)
CN_T2, CN_T13, CN_T1,CN_T9, CN_T22, CN_T30
Handicappedped COP Installation and Connection
In the Handicappedped COP, 『B2 cable』 and『C1 cable』 are taken out. Connect 『B2 cable』 to main COP COP-30D board. Connect 『C1 cable』 to SB2 connector taken out from C1 of the main COP DI-PBX II board. Cable Name
Starting Point
DISABLE COP CAN communication cable (C1)
WCOP30 Board
Emergency call button cable (B2)
Emergency call button
CN_W1
Destination MAIN COP-30D Board
CN_C6
CAR TOP
SB2
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
2.0 2014-05-30 38 / 95
5) Sub COP Connection In sub COP, 『CAN communication cable: C2』 and 『Emergency call button cable: B2』 are taken out. Connect『C2 cable』 to the main COP COP-30D board. Connect『B2 cable』to SB2 connector taken out from CN1 of COP DI-PBX II board. Cable Name
Starting Point
CAN communication cable (C2)
SUB COP-30D Board
Emergency call button cable (B2)
Emergency call button
CN_C10
Destination MAIN COP-30D Board
CN_C10
CAR TOP
SB2
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 39 / 95
5.3.2 Cautions during the Connections between CAN Communication Boards 1) End jumper For smooth CAN communication, end resistor should be attached to the first and end part of CAN bus. Therefore, there is a jumper (end jumper) in CTC board (CAR Top Control Board) to be able to turn ON/OFF the end resistor. If the end jumper is incorrectly set, CAN communication error may occur. 2)
ID setting COP Classification
COP-30D board SW1 NO.1
COP Classification
WCOP30 board SW1
Main
OFF
Expansion of the number of floors for Main COP 31 floors or more
2 ON
Sub (Penetration type Rear)
ON
Handicapped COP
ALL OFF
* After changing ID setting, the power of the board should be turned OFF ->ON for recognition.
•
Connect 『CAN communication cable』“C1” taken out from the Handicapped COP and『CAN communication cable』“C2" taken out from SUB COP to the
main COP. Wire the cable through bottom of the CAR, NOT THROUGH TOP OF THE CAR
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 40 / 95
Reference 1) COP Combination Inside the CAR (30 floors or less) COP B'd Combination (Under 30 Floors) Number
Precondition (MAIN COP) [SIG. INPUT : CN_C1]
Combination 1 (MAIN + Disabled 1)
MAIN (=MAIN COP) (GOOD : COP-30D B'd)
WCOP1 (=Disabled COP 1) (GOOD : WCOP30 B'd)
Connection
CN_C6 (→ WCOP1 CN_W1)
CN_W1 (→ MAIN CN_C6)
SW1
(NONE)
SW1.ALL OFF
Combination 2 (MAIN + SUB + Disabled 1)
MAIN (=MAIN COP) (GOOD : COP-30D B'd)
SUB (=SUB COP) (GOOD : COP-30D B'd)
Connection
CN_C10 (→ SUB CN_C10) CN_C6 (→ WCOP1 CN_W1)
CN_C10 (→ MAIN CN_C10)
SW1
(NONE)
SW1.1 ON
Combination 3 (MAIN + SUB)
MAIN (=MAIN COP) (GOOD : COP-30D B'd)
SUB (=SUB COP) (GOOD : COP-30D B'd)
Connection
CN_C10 (→ SUB CN_C10)
CN_C10 (→ MAIN CN_C10)
SW1
(NONE)
SW1.1 ON
COMBINATION 4 (MAIN + Disabled 1 + Disabled 2)
MAIN (=MAIN COP) (GOOD : COP-30D B'd)
WCOP1 (=Disabled COP 1) (GOOD : WCOP30 B'd)
Connection
CN_C6 (→ WCOP1 CN_W1) CN_C7 (→ WCOP2 CN_W1)
CN_W1 (→ MAIN CN_C6)
SW1
(NONE)
SW1.ALL OFF
Selection 1 (SUB COP)
Selection 2 (WCOP1)
Selection 3 (WCOP2)
WCOP1 (=Disabled COP 1) (GOOD : WCOP30 B'd) CN_W1 (→ MAIN CN_C6) SW1.ALL OFF
WCOP2 (=Disabled COP 2) (GOOD : WCOP30 B'd)
CN_W1 (→ MAIN CN_C7) SW1.1 ON
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
2.0 2014-05-30 41 / 95
Reference 2) COP Combination Inside the CAR (62 floors or less) COP B'd Combination (Uuder 62) Number
Precondition (MAIN COP) [SIG. INPUT : CN_C1]
Precondition (WCOP1)
Combination 1 (MAIN + Disabled 1)
MAIN (=MAIN COP) (GOOD : COP-30D B'd)
WCOP1 (=Ext COP 1) (GOOD : WCOP62 B'd)
Connection
CN_C8 (→ WCOP1 CN_W1) CN_C6 (→ WCOP3 CN_W1)
CN_W1 (→ MAIN CN_C8)
SW1
SW1.2 ON
SW1.2 ON
Combination 2 (MAIN + SUB + DISABLED1)
MAIN (=MAIN COP) (GOOD : COP-30D B'd)
WCOP1 (=Ext COP 1) (GOOD : WCOP62 B'd)
Connection
CN_C8 (→ WCOP1 CN_W1) CN_C10 (→ SUB CN_C10) CN_C6 (→ WCOP3 CN_W1)
SW1
SW1.2 ON
SW1.2 ON)
SW1.2 ON
Combination 3 (MAIN + SUB)
MAIN (=MAIN COP) (GOOD : COP-30D B'd)
WCOP1 (=Ext COP 1) (GOOD : WCOP62 B'd)
SUB (=SUB COP) (GOOD : COP-30D B'd)
WCOP2 (=Ext COP 2) (GOOD : WCOP62 B'd)
Connection
CN_C8 (→ WCOP1 CN_W1) CN_C10 (→ SUB CN_C10)
CN_W1 (→ MAIN CN_C8)
CN_C8 (→ WCOP2 CN_W1) CN_C10 (→ MAIN CN_C10)
CN_W1 (→ SUB CN_C8)
SW1
SW1.2 ON
SW1.2 ON
SW1.2 ON
Combination 4 (MAIN + DISABLED1 + DISABLED2)
MAIN (=MAIN COP) (GOOD : COP-30D B'd)
WCOP1 (=Ext COP 1) (GOOD : WCOP62 B'd)
WCOP3 (=Disabled COP 1) (GOOD : WCOP62 B'd)
WCOP4 (=Disabled COP 2) (GOOD : WCOP62 B'd)
Connection
CN_C8 (→ WCOP1 CN_W1) CN_C6 (→ WCOP3 CN_W1) CN_C7 (→ WCOP4 CN_W1)
CN_W1 (→ MAIN CN_C8)
CN_W1 (→ MAIN CN_C6)
CN_W1 (→ MAIN CN_C7)
SW1
SW1.2 ON
SW1.2 ON
SW1.ALL OFF
SW1.1 ON
CN_W1 (→ MAIN CN_C8)
Selection 1 (SUB COP)
Selection 1 (WCOP2)
Selection 2 (WCOP3)
Selection 3 (WCOP4)
WCOP3 (=Disabled COP 1) (GOOD : WCOP62 B'd)
CN_W1 (→ MAIN CN_C6)
SW1.ALL OFF
SUB (=SUB COP) (GOOD : COP-30D B'd)
CN_C8 (→ WCOP2 CN_W1) CN_C10 (→ MAIN CN_C10)
WCOP2 (=Ext COP 2) (GOOD : WCOP62 B'd)
WCOP3 (=Disabled COP 1) (GOOD : WCOP62 B'd)
CN_W1 (→ SUB CN_C8) CN_W1 (→ MAIN CN_C6)
SW1.1 + SW1.2 ON
SW1.ALL OFF
SW1.1 + SW1.2 ON
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
2.0 2014-05-30 42 / 95
5.4 How to Set Hall Indicator Device 1) CPI Installation and Connection After attaching CPI box to the CAR, precisely connect the sticking out CPI cable to CTC Board CN_T12 connector. For CPI with DIP switches, turn all DIP switches to OFF or ON state to use it only for indication. Cable Name
Starting Point
CPI cable (D1)
CPI
CH1
Destination Point CTC
CN_T12
5.5 Other Matters for Setting 5.5.1 Voice Synthesis Device Speaker Volume Adjustment Use COP-30D board VR1. 5.5.2 Cautions during the Replacement of COP-30D Board When you replace COP-30D board, perform by the following order. ① Turn OFF CONTROL PANEL main power blocker NFB1 to turn off the CAR DC24V power, and perform the work. Do not take out or install a board while the power is supplied, it may cause damage ② CAR buttons are inserted in sequence from the lowest floor CU1, and the cable colors are different for each floor, so distinguish by this characteristic when the connector is taken out and inserted again. ③ Insert Door Open button to CU64 (DOB) and Door Close button to CU63 (DCB). ④ When you replace COP-30D board, match the jumper pin settings with the previous COP-30D board.
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 43 / 95
6. Machine Room Harness 6.1 MCPU Connection 6.1.1 Board Composition Main board can be divided to CPU part, Memory part, Analog part, Digital part, Communication part, and Display part. Refer to the main board structure in the below [Figure 6.1] for the names or each part, and refer to 6.1.2 Connector Name for the names or the connectors. Before supplying the power to the main board, make sure to check the connector connections.
[Figure 6.1 Main Board]
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
2.0 2014-05-30 44 / 95
6.1.2 Connector Name CN
Item
Remark
CN1
MAIN POWER
Main board power
CN2
JTAG
JTAG connector
CN3
SCI
Control board monitoring
CN4
EzPort
Control board Download connector
CN5
OPTION BOARD
OPTION BOARD connector
CN6
GATE
GATE SIGNAL input/output
CN7
ENCODER
ENCODER BOARD connector
CN8
LOAD INPUT
LOAD input (not used)
CN9
INVERTER CURRENT SENSING
Inverter current sensing
CN10
INPUT DC-LINK SENSING
DC LINK voltage sensing
CN11
CAN1
CAR CAN communication
CN12
CAN2
HALL CAN communication
CN13
D/A Converter
D/A output
CN14
RS232
HRTS
CN15
RS-485
RS 485 communication(monitoring panel)
CN16
KEYPAD
Key-Pad(HHT) connector
CN17
INPUT
Up Slowdown switch
CN18
INPUT
Down Slowdown switch
CN19
INPUT
Landing Vane sensor
CN20
INPUT
Safety line monitoring
CN21
INPUT
Control input signal
CN22
OUTPUT
Control output signal
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 45 / 95
6.1.3 Main Board Power Specification CN
CN1
PIN
Item
1
VCC(+5V)
2
GND
3
-15V
4
+15V
Remark
Main board power
6.1.4 Check Points after Supplying the Power LED
Item
Remark
LED1
VCC(+5V) checking signal
ON
LED2
Watch Dog checking signal
Blinking
LED3
DC Link input checking signal
ON
LED4,LED5
CAR CAN blinking signal
Blinking
LED6,LED7
HALL CAN blinking signal
Blinking
In normal operation, LED1 and LED3are ON, and LED2, LED4, LED5, LED6, and LED7 are blinking.
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF
6.2 SAF Board Connection 6.2.1 SAF Board Composition ⑨
⑬
⑫
⑪
① ② ⑭
③
⑮ ④
⑤
⑥
⑦
⑧
[Figure 6.2 SAF Board]
⑩
2.0 2014-05-30 46 / 95
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 47 / 95
6.2.2 Connector Names CN
Item
Description
Remark
CN_S1
Control panel emergency stop
CN_S2
Pit safety line
Site connection (pit cable)
Figure 6.2②
CN_S3
Governor (for terminal block connection)
*Note 1.
Figure 6.2③
CN_S4
Up final limit
Site connection (hoist way cable)
Figure 6.2④
CN_S5
Down final limit
Site connection (hoist way cable)
Figure 6.2⑤
CN_S6
Landing door
Site connection (interlock)
Figure 6.2⑥
CN_S7
Landing door
Site connection (interlock)
Figure 6.2⑦
CN_S8
CAR safety line
Site connection (T.CABLE)
Figure 6.2⑧
CN_S9
For electrical emergency operation jumper
Figure 6.2⑨
CN_S11
For SAF board power
Figure 6.2⑩
CN_S12
For safety relay fuse inspection
Figure 6.2⑪
CN_S13
For safety line monitoring
Figure 6.2⑫
CN_S14
MRL external input/output signal connection
Figure 6.2⑬
CN_S19A
Landing van signal
Site connection (T.CABLE)
Figure 6.2⑭
CN_S19B
Landing van signal
Main Board connection
Figure 6.2⑮
Figure 6.2①
Governor site connection is performed at TBMB-1 and TBMB-2 terminal block.
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF
6.3 USAF Board Connection 6.3.1 USAF Board Composition
17
18
13
12
11
16 9 15 1 2 3 4
5
6
7
8
[Figure 6.3 USAF Board]
10
14
2.0 2014-05-30 48 / 95
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 49 / 95
6.3.2 Connector Names CN
Item
Description
Remark
CN_S1
Control panel emergency stop
CN_S2
Pit safety line
Site connection (pit cable)
Figure 6.3②
CN_S3
Governor (for terminal block connection)
*Note 1.
Figure 6.3③
CN_S4
Top part final limit
Site connection (hoist way cable)
Figure 6.3④
CN_S5
Bottom part final limit
Site connection (hoist way cable)
Figure 6.3⑤
CN_S6
Landing door
Site connection (interlock)
Figure 6.3⑥
CN_S7
Landing door
Site connection (interlock)
Figure 6.3⑦
CN_S8
CAR safety line
Site connection (T.CABLE)
Figure 6.3⑧
CN_S9
For electrical emergency operation jumper
Figure 6.3⑨
CN_S11
For SAF board power
Figure 6.3⑩
CN_S12
For safety relay fuse inspection
Figure 6.3⑪
CN_S13
For safety line monitoring
Figure 6.3⑫
CN_S14
MRL external input/output signal connection
Figure 6.3⑬
CN_S19A
Landing van signal
Site connection (T.CABLE)
Figure 6.3⑭
CN_S19B
Landing van signal
Main B'd connection
Figure 6.3⑮
CN_S22
For Door zone sensor signal
UCMP B’d connection
Figure 6.3
CN_S23
For car door & landing door s/w signal
UCMP B’d connection
Figure 6.3
CN_S24
UCMP safety line
UCMP B’d connection
Figure 6.3
Figure 6.3①
Governor site connection is performed at TBMB-1 and TBMB-2 terminal block.
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF
6.4 UCMP Board Connection 6.4.1 UCMP Board Composition
9
13
12
11
1 2 15
3
4
5
6
7
8
[Figure 6.4 UCMP Board]
10
14
2.0 2014-05-30 50 / 95
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 51 / 95
6.4.2 Connector Names CN
Item
Description DC 24V
Remark Figure 6.4①
UCPW
UCMP Board power
ICE
Program downloading connector
UCIN1
MNT, SS, RST Signal
UCIN2
For Door zone sensor signal
UCIN3
Door switch signal
UCSS
For safety line
Figure 6.4⑥
MNT
Monitoring relay
Figure 6.4⑦
DZA
Door zone signal relay 1
/w DZA LED
Figure 6.4⑧
DZB
Door zone signal relay 2
/w DZB LED
Figure 6.4⑨
CDR
Car door signal relay
/W CDR LED
Figure 6.4⑩
LDR
Landing door signal relay
/W LDR LED
Figure 6.4⑪
SSA
Safety relay 1
Figure 6.4⑫
SSB
Safety relay 2
Figure 6.4⑬
ER_RESET S/W
Clear UCM error
WDT LED
WATCH DOG LED
Figure 6.4② MNT : Monitoring Relay SS : SSA, SSB Status ER_RST : Clear error
Figure 6.4③ Figure 6.4④
Car door, landing door
/w ER_LED
Figure 6.4⑤
Figure 6.4⑭ Figure 6.4⑮
Governor site connection is performed at TBMB-1 and TBMB-2 terminal block.
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 52 / 95
7. High Speed Test Drive 7.1 Check List before High Speed Drive When all connections and connecting works are completed, inspection work for high speed operation should be carried out. 7.1.1 Balance Work Adjust the counter weight to be exactly at 50% balanced state. When it is 50% balance load in car, inverter load current become similar during UP/DOWN operation the inverter load current becomes uniform. The inverter load current is MONITOR → BASIC → INV CURRENT of HHT menu. 7.1.2 Door Operator work Refer to the Door Controller Manual to adjust the door. 7.1.3 Landing Control Operation Verification Use the main board landing sensor operation indicator 7-segment to check the status of the landing signal inputs. ULA DZ DLA Landing sensor signal
Floor information (0~99)
LCD sensor Shelter plate
Correct landing state
Over the floor level
[Figure 7.1 Landing Sensor Information Display] 7.1.4 Final Limit Switch Operation Verification Check the switch location and operation is correct
Under the floor level
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 53 / 95
7.2 How to Set the Initial Operation •
The example of the description is based on the total 32 floors.
•
Insert HHT to the main board “CN16" connector.
① Set the AUTO/INS switches at On Car(Car Junction Box) and In Car to “AUTO” position. But set AUTO/MCS switch at Control Panel to “MCS”position. ② Using the machine room manual UP and DOWN switches, stop the CAR at the location when DLA signal is turned OFF starting from the lowest floor.
LCD sensor Shelter plate
Main board 7-segment display ③ Use HHT menu to select the installation automatic operation mode. From the following HHT initial menu, select [2] SYSTEM MENU.
From FIELD MODE SET-UP menu, select “AUTO DRIVE". ④ Use the main board HHT menu to input the site’s maximum number of floors data (MAX FLOOR). In the following HHT initial menu, select [1] INVERTER MENU.
Select 02 PROGRAM → 01 CONTROL → 26 MAX FLOOR menu, and input the site’s maximum number of floors.
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 54 / 95
⑤ Select 02 PROGRAM → 01 CONTROL → 34 INIT START menu, input "1" input, and when you press ENT key, HHT operation mode is changed to “Initial_Drve".
⑥ When you operate the control panel ONU switch (manual operation UP switch), initial operation starts. When the initial operation starts, even if ONU switch is reset, the operation continues. •
When the initial operation starts, the floor number information and the landing sensor input status of each floor are displayed on the main board 7-segment.
•
If the highest floor checking signal (PLUL) is inputted, after the deceleration and correct landing in the highest floor landing zone, it completes the initial operation. If the highest floor checking signal (PLUL) is not inputted, deceleration is not done, and it causes elevator accident. Therefore, for the initial operation, make sure to check the highest floor checking signal (PLUL) location and the existence of the input.
•
After completing the initial operation, if there is an error in the highest floor information, the number of the landing VANEs, etc., the initial operation error “ER_INITIAL" occurs.
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 55 / 95
7.3 How to Test High Speed Drive •
Refer to the inverter manual to check the inverter data again.
•
If the initial operation is successfully completed, HHT menu MONITOR → BASIC → INITIAL becomes "OK", and check if it is a safe operation condition again.
•
Set the machine room AUTO/MCS switch at ‘AUTO’. (From then on, automatic operation is possible.)
•
Check normal operation by hall call, HIP (HPI), and operation status of the door.
•
Get in the CAR and check normal operation of the door, and check the operation status of call input/output and indicator operations.
•
When you carry out the test mode operation, follow the below HHT setting method.
In [2] SYSTEM MENU → [1] SYSTEM TEST menu, select “test mode”. Menu Category
Function Description
1. SIMPLE MODE
Automatic operation test (Activated by the machine room manual call, and the door maintains the closed state.)
2. DETAIL MODE
Automatic operation test (Operation time, operation floors, and individual door status setting)
1)
Simple Mode
Use UP or DN key to select 1 or 0, and press ENT key. Setting: 1 → ENT
Reset: 0 → ENT
•
Operation mode : automatic operation (Reset when it is converted to manual operation, and when it changes from manual → automatic, it returns to the test mode.)
•
DOOR status : maintains CLOSED (If SIMPLE MODE is set when the door is open, it automatically CLOSES.)
•
Call recognition : Only CAR calls are recognized. (Hall calls are ignored.) → Manual CAR call registration using HHT is possible.
•
DISPLAY : “Under Inspection” is displayed on the CAR and hall side display device (HIP/HPI).
WBVF 2)
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 56 / 95
Detail Mode
Use UP or DN key to select 1 or 0, and press ENT key. Setting: 1 → ENT
Reset: 0 → ENT
Menu Category
Function Description
1. TEST PERIOD
TEST operation time setting
2. DOOR CTRL
Door activation condition setting
3. TEST FLOOR
TEST operation section (floors) setting
Menu Category
Function Description
ALL
24 hours all day test (Unless test mode is reset, it is maintained)
SPECIFIC
When it becomes the set time every day, it is converted to the test mode. Ex) 1. If you have start time (18:00) and end time (20:00) → Automatic test operation is carried out for 2 hours every day from 6PM ~ 8PM 2. If you have start time (20:00) and end time (08:00) → Automatic test operation is carried out for 12 hours every day from 8PM ~ 8AM the next day 3. If the start time and the end time are the same (start time-20:00, end time-20:00) → It is converted to the test mode for 24 hours all day long as the same as ALL.
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 57 / 95
Menu Category
Function Description
AUTO
With automatic door operation.
CLOSE
DOOR maintains CLOSED state (OPEN button action is invalid.)
Menu Category
Function Description
ALL
All floors test
SPECIFIC
Repeated operation in certain section (2 floors)
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
7.3.1 How to Register Manual Call using HHT [2]SYSTEM MENU → [3] DATA SET UP → 6. CALL DATA → 1. MANUAL CALL
Menu Category
Function Description
1. CALL CALL
CAR call registration
2. UP HALL CALL
UP hall call registration
3. DN HALL CALL
DN hall call registration
Ex) When you select CAR CALL menu, it is displayed on HHT screen as follows. How to register CALL: Select floor to register (Using UP/DN key) → ENT
2.0 2014-05-30 58 / 95
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
2.0 2014-05-30 59 / 95
7.3.2 How to Set Display Code for Each Floor using HHT [2]SYSTEM MENU → [3] DATA SET UP → 4. FLOOR DATA → 2. FLOOR DISPLAY
WBVF model does not use a separate DISPLAY CODE, and direct input is used for DISPLAY DATA to be displayed at each floor, and you can input up to 3 characters. Ex) If underground floor 1 is to be displayed as "B1" Display Data Previous Method
16 (hex)
WBVF
B1
Floor information Contents of floor display
Menu Category
Function Description
1) VIEW & CHANGE
Each FLOOR CODE setting check and change
2) INIT FLOOR CODE
All FLOOR CODE initial
1) How to Use VIEW & CHANGE Menu
Alphabet lowercase letter x means no display. 1xx : among the 3 positions that can be displayed, only “1” at the first position is displayed. That is, it means floor “1”. 2) ① ② ③
How to Input DISPLAY DATA Select floor to register (Using UP/DN key) → ENT Use UP/DN key to select numbers (0~9), alphabet (A~Z) and special characters (+, -, *) → ENT You select space “ ”, it does not display anything.
3) How to Use INIT FLOOR CODE Menu If you select INIT FLOOR CODE menu, it is automatically initialized based on the MAX FLOOR information and the underground floor information currently set in the system. Ex) Max Floor : 32nd floor, Basement Floor : 5th floor 1st ~ 5th floor: B5 ~ B1, 6th ~ 32nd floors: automatically set to display as 1st ~ 27th floor.
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 60 / 95
7.4 How to Set Load for Load Cell ① 7.1 Balance Work part must be completed before the load cell load setting, and if the counter weight is properly placed, there will be no load current during the manual DOWN operation. ② Check INV current is within the rated current of the motor by HHT (MONITOR → BASIC → INV CURRENT). ③ For load cell load setting, select the inverter HHT menu PROGRAM → CONTROL → TQBIAS SELEC as “AUTO". For the detail parameters of the load setting, refer to the load setting method in WBVF O&M manual-inverter part.
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 61 / 95
[Figure 7.2 Indicator Board] No.
Name
Contents
Remark
2
FL_SET JUMPER
JUMP during the setting of the corresponding floor.
The currently set floor is displayed at JUMP.
11
REAR JUMPER
When JUMP is reset, it operates as REAR (=handicap) HIP.
In normal times, JUMP is set.
7
Button connection part
It connects the button for the CAR call of the corresponding floor.
CH2, CH2B
9
Power / communication connection part
It connects for 24VDC and CAN communication.
CH1, CH4
8
Hall chime / Hall lantern
It is connected when hall chime / hall lantern is used.
CH5 or CH3
1
Program input
It is connected and applied during the program UPDATE.
J1
5
PARKING input part
It connects the cable at the parking floor.
CH6
6
FMR input part
It connects to the firefighter call (=FMR) switch.
CH7
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 62 / 95
7.5 How to Set Hall Indicator 7.5.1 Indicator Installation and Floor Input ① Insert the connector coming out of the hall button into CH1 or CH4 of the indicator board ② There is a FL_SET JUMP pin in the hall indicator, and during the installation, you need to input the floors according to the ID data of each floor. Refer to Figure 7.2 for HIP / HIP MINI / HPI / CPI / floor input procedure!
Step
Contents
1
Connect 24VDC power to the CH1 or CH4 of HIP / HPI Board
2
Connect the UP / DOWN Button to the CH2 or CH2B of board
3
Jump the FL_SET(=JP3)
4
Input the floors according to the ID data of each floor by seeing the DOT-MATRIX display
5
Push the UP or DOWN Button during 5 sec
6
If you can see the alternating display 『OK』 and 『setting floor』 on the DOT-MATRIX, the floor setting is completed
7
Release FL_SET(=JP3) jumper
Note
Setting
Completed Release setting mode
the floor ID can be set from 1 to 96, the English display after 96 floor is special functions. Floor ID
Set Floor ID
CP
In case that by using the CAR indicator
HP
In case of using 2 indicator on hall, one thing have to set as floor ID HP
SV
In case that by using the supervisor indicator
Note
When it Applies SUPERVISORY option
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 63 / 95
Refer to the following Step included in the picture for better understanding!
Example of floor input) If you want to 24th floor ID to HIP Step 3
Step 4, 5
JUMP FL_SET
MAKE 17FL BY USING UP or DOWN BUTTON
Step 6
Step 7
Push the button during 5sec then check 『OK』 sign
Release FL_SET jumper
This work must be carried out when JUMPER is set on FL_SET.
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 64 / 95
IMPORTANT! HANDICAPPED SETTING : Remove the jumper at REAR DIP of HIP or HPI board. ① During the connection of HIP (HPI) cable, check if there is a reversed connection, disconnection, or short-circuit of P24, N24, CH, CL, etc. ② Check if DC24V power is normal. ③ Floor input setting should not overlap with another floor. ④ During the connector connection and disconnection, work after turning the power OFF. ⑤ Manage the site thoroughly to prevent the damage of the material.
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 65 / 95
7.5.2 Hall Indicator Operation and Troubleshooting Floor side indicator is in charge of not only the floor display and operation related lamp display, which is its original role, but also is in charge of the input/output of the button signals. Therefore, you need to be aware of the following abnormal operations of the indicator and the causes.
① When it is stopped: floor is displayed ② When the direction is selected, and operation is in preparation: floor and arrow are displayed in turn.
③ When it is in operation: floor display is scrolled and changed according to the operation direction.
7.5.3 Verification of other Optional Functions Refer to the site specifications to check if the optional function is correctly working.
7.5.4 Finish Work •
If all the works are completed, arrange the cables inside the CAR junction box.
•
Clean the inside of door sill of each floor to prevent malfunction by foreign object.
•
Finish the cleaning of the inside of the hoist way and machine room.
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 66 / 95
Appendix A. VCON Board Manual IMPORTANT! READ SAFETY INFORMATION before using a VCON Board.
•
Install the circuit-braker for effective power disconnection when the board is operated for the first time
•
Check the location of the circuit-braker
•
Remove the parts that may cause danger during the work.
•
Refer to “VCON Board Manual” carefully because VCON board may be operated in an unpredicted method during the operation. It may cause danger due to wrong voltage or wrong connection and it may cause danger.
•
Voltage adjustment work must be performed by the qualified personnel.
•
Make sure to check the connections before the test.
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 67 / 95
1. VCON Board Composition and Function [Figure A.1 VCON Board Composition] shows the composition of VCON board.
[Figure A.1 VCON Board Composition] As you see in [Figure A.1 VCON Board Composition], VCON board is divided to 2 parts, DC 110V output (CN_V4) and the part for adjusting the brake operating voltage. DC 110V output uses input AC 85V, and AC220V make the brake operating voltage which is required applied brake. Brake holding operation voltage can be controlled by variable resistor (R1) in the board(holding volt : 120V ~ 60V).
Voltage status
Operation voltage boundary
Starting voltage
200Vdc ∼ 110Vdc
Holding voltage
120Vdc ∼60Vdc [Table A.1 Brake Operation Voltage Setting]
Voltage Tolerance ±10%
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 68 / 95
2. VCON Board Connection The connector names and the connection diagram of VCON board in [Figure A.1 VCON Board Composition] are the same as [Table A.2 VCON Board Connector], [Figure A.2 VCON Board Brake Voltage Connection Diagram], and [Figure A.3 VCON Board Safety Line Voltage Connection Diagram]. Connector Name
Pin Name A220B
CN_V1
B220 P24 DBKB
CN_V2
CN_V3
P160 N160 A85B B85
Function
Connection TR1 A220 [Vac] connection
Brake voltage board input
Voltage input for the operation of RE1 (power relay)
TR1 B220 [Vac] connection MC2 Pin no.14 connection Main board DBKB connection BKA Pin no.1 connection
Brake voltage output
BKA Pin no.3 connection TR1 A85 [Vac] connection
Input voltage to generate DC 110V voltage
TR1 B85 [Vac] connection
P110 CN_V4
N110
NPR connection DC 110V output voltage
SAF board CN_S11-4 connection
N110
GND connection [Table A.2 VCON Board Connector]
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 69 / 95
Appendix B. Inverter Initial Start-Up Manual Perform the drive for initial angle setting when initially starting up the synchronous machine.
1. Synchronous Machine Section
Control
Motor
Factory
1)
Item
Remark
EL SPEED
Elevator Speed
MAX RPM
Motor RPM according to Elevator Speed
MAX FLOOR
Elevator Maximum Floors
FWD DIRECTION
Elevator Driving Direction
INVERTER SEL
Inverter Capacity
MOTOR SELECT
Motor Selection
KNOW ANGLE
Status of Initial Angle Setting
U Angle
Initial Angle
SINCOS THETA
Status of inputting SIN-COS Encoder Max/Min Value
SIN MAX
SIN-COS Encoder SIN MAX Value
SIN MIN
SIN-COS Encoder SIN MIN Value
COS MAX
SIN-COS Encoder COS MAX Value
COS MIN
SIN-COS Encoder COS MIN Value
SINCOS Encoder Synchronous Machine Initial Angle Setting ① 2. PROGRAM > 3. MOTOR > 10. Know Angle : ‘0’ Setting. ② 2. PROGRAM > 4. FACTORY > 13. SINCOS THETA : ‘OFF’ Setting. ③ Make Inspection Drive Mode and the Press Inspection UP Button until motor around 5 times. ④ 2. PROGRAM > 4. FACTORY > 14. SINMAX : Normal Value 3500~4095 2. PROGRAM > 4. FACTORY > 15. SINMIN : Normal Value 100~500 2. PROGRAM > 4. FACTORY > 16. COSMAX : Normal Value 3500~4095 2. PROGRAM > 4. FACTORY > 17. COSMIN : Normal Value 100~500 (When SINMAX, COSMAX, SINMIN, COSMIN value are not property , Pleas See’ ‘2) SINCOS Encoder Synchronous Machine Trouble Shooting’ and then Try again to ②, ③. ⑤ Make Inspection Drive Mode and the Press Inspection UP Button until motor around 5 times. ⑥ Change Know Angle value to 1 by HHT and then check the 2. PROGRAM > 3. MOTOR > 11. U ANGLE Value was changed
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 70 / 95
⑦ Check the CURRENT and ROTOR POS Value under 1 by HHT 1. MONITOR > 1. BASIC > CURRENT 2. MONITOR > 1. BASIC > ROTOR POS ⑧ If CURRENT or ROTOR POS Value are more then 1, Please see ‘2) SINCOS Encoder Synchronous Machine Trouble Shooting’ and then Try again to ①~⑦. ⑨ Initial Angle Setting end.
2)
SINCOS Encoder Synchronous Machine Trouble Shooting ① Check the U.V.W Line. ② Check the cable between Encoder and Encoder board. ③ Check the cable between Gate board and Main board (In Main board CN6). ④ 2. PROGRAM > 1. CONTROL > 13. TQBIAS SELEC : ‘NO USE TQBIAS ‘ Check. ⑤ 2. PROGRAM > 3. MOTOR > 1. INVERTER SEL : ‘INVERTER SPEC’ Check ⑥ 2. PROGRAM > 3. MOTOR > 2. MOTOR SELECT : ‘MOTOR SPEC’ Check ⑦ 2. PROGRAM > 3. MOTOR > 7. PG PULSE : ‘131072’ Check ⑧ 2. PROGRAM > 3. MOTOR > 12. ANGEL METHOD : ‘DC ALIGN’ Check. ⑨ 2. PROGRAM > 4. FACTORY > 12. ENCODER TYPE : ‘SINCOS ENC’ Check
3)
INCREMENTAL Encoder Synchronous Machine Initial Angle Setting ① 2. PROGRAM > 3. MOTOR > 10. Know Angle : ‘0’ Setting. ② 2. PROGRAM > 4. FACTORY > 13. SINCOS THETA : ‘OFF’ Setting. ③ Change Know Angle value to 1 by HHT and then check the 2. PROGRAM > 3. MOTOR > 11. U ANGLE Value was changed ④ Check the CURRENT and ROTOR POS Value under 1 by HHT 1. MONITOR > 1. BASIC > CURRENT 1. MONITOR > 1. BASIC > ROTOR POS ⑤ If CURRENT or ROTOR POS Value are more then 1, Please see ‘2) INCREMENTAL Encoder Synchronous Machine Trouble Shooting’ and then Try again to ①~④. ⑥ Initial Angle Setting end.
4)
INCREMENTAL Encoder Synchronous Machine Trouble Shooting ① Check the U.V.W Line. ② Check the cable between Encoder and Encoder board. ③ Check the cable between Gate board and Main board (In Main board CN6). ④ 2. PROGRAM > 1. CONTROL > 13. TQBIAS SELEC : ‘NO USE TQBIAS ‘ Check. ⑤ 2. PROGRAM > 3. MOTOR > 1. INVERTER SEL : ‘INVERTER SPEC’ Check ⑥ 2. PROGRAM > 3. MOTOR > 2. MOTOR SELECT : ‘MOTOR SPEC’ Check ⑦ 2. PROGRAM > 3. MOTOR > 7. PG PULSE : ‘131072’ Check ⑧ 2. PROGRAM > 3. MOTOR > 12. ANGEL METHOD : ‘DC ALIGN’ Check. ⑨ 2. PROGRAM > 4. FACTORY > 12. ENCODER TYPE : ‘INC ENC Check
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 71 / 95
2. Induction Machine Section
Control
Motor
Item
Remark
EL SPEED
Elevator Speed
MAX RPM
Motor RPM according to Elevator Speed
MAX FLOOR
Elevator Maximum Floors
FWD DIRECTION
Elevator Driving Direction
INVERTER SEL
Inverter Capacity
MOTOR SELECT
Motor Selection
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 72 / 95
Appendix C. Description WBVF System Board 1. Control Panel PC Board •
Make sure to turn off Main Power when you replace PCB Board
•
The board’s settings are all set from the factory. Do not reset except for trouble shooting or replacement.
1.1 Main Board
[Figure C.1 Main Board]
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 73 / 95
1) Main PC Board. Power Specification CON
CN1
Pin
Name
1
VCC(+5V)
2
GND
3
-15V
4
+15V
Remark
MAIN POWER
2) Check Points after Applying the Power LED
Item
Remark
LED1(POWER)
MAIN BOARD VCC supply verification signal
ON
LED2(WDT)
DSP Watch Dog verification signal
Blinking
LED3
DC LINK input verification signal
ON
LED4, LED5
CAN1 TX1, RX1 verification signal
Blinking
LED6, LED7
CAN2 TX2, RX2 verification signal
Blinking
In normal operation, LED1 and LED3 are ON, and LED2, LED4, LED5, LED6, and LED7 are blinking.
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 74 / 95
1.2 SAF Board SAF Board
No.
Name
Description
Remark
1
CN_S1
Control Panel emergency stop
2
CN_S2
Feet safety line
3
CN_S3
Governor (for terminal block wiring)
4
CN_S4
Up final limit
Site wiring(hoist way)
5
CN_S5
Down final limit
Site wiring(hoist way)
6
CN_S6
Boarding floor door
Site wiring(interlock)
7
CN_S7
Boarding floor door
Site wiring(interlock)
8
CN_S8
Car safety line
Site wiring(T-CABLE)
9
CN_S9
For electrical emergency operation jumper
10
CN_S11
For SAF board power
11
CN_S12
For safety relay fuse inspection
12
CN_S13
For safety line monitoring
13
CN_S14
MRL external input/output signal connection
14
CN_S19A
Installed vane signal
15
CN_S19B
Installed vane signal
Site wiring(feet)
Site wiring(T-CABLE)
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 75 / 95
1.3 USAF Board USAF Board
No.
Name
Description
Remark
1
CN_S1
Control Panel emergency stop
2
CN_S2
Feet safety line
3
CN_S3
Governor (for terminal block wiring)
4
CN_S4
Upper part final limit
Site wiring(hoist way)
5
CN_S5
Lower part final limit
Site wiring(hoist way)
6
CN_S6
Boarding floor door
Site wiring(interlock)
7
CN_S7
Boarding floor door
Site wiring(interlock)
8
CN_S8
Car safety line
Site wiring(T-CABLE)
9
CN_S9
For electrical emergency operation jumper
10
CN_S11
For SAF board power
11
CN_S12
For safety relay fuse inspection
12
CN_S13
For safety line monitoring
13
CN_S14
MRL external input/output signal connection
14
CN_S19A
Installed vane signal
15
CN_S19B
Installed vane signal
16
CN_S22
For Door zone sensor signal
UCMP B’d connection
17
CN_S23
For car door & landing door s/w signal
UCMP B’d connection
18
CN_S24
UCMP safety line
UCMP B’d connection
Site wiring(feet)
Site wiring(T-CABLE)
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 76 / 95
1.4 UCMP Board UCMP Board
No.
Name
Description
Remark
1
UCPW
UCMP Board power
DC 24V
2
ICE
Program downloading connector
3
UCIN1
MNT, SS, RST Signal
4
UCIN2
For Door zone sensor signal
5
UCIN3
Door switch signal
6
UCSS
For safety line
7
MNT
Monitoring relay
8
DZA
Door zone signal relay 1
/w DZA LED
9
DZB
Door zone signal relay 2
/w DZB LED
10
CDR
Car door signal relay
/W CDR LED
11
LDR
Landing door signal relay
/W LDR LED
12
SSA
Safety relay 1
13
SSB
Safety relay 2
14
ER_RESET S/W
Clear UCM error
15
WDT LED
WATCH DOG LED
MNT : Monitoring Relay SS : SSA, SSB Status ER_RST : Clear error
Car door, landing door
/w ER_LED
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 77 / 95
1.5 VCON Board VCON Board
No.
Name
Description
Remark
1
CN_V1
Brake control power input
AC220V(for rectification) / DC24V(for control)
2
CN_V2
Brake output power
DC90~DC160
3
CN_V3
Safety line AC85V input
AC85V
4
CN_V4
Safety line DC110V output
DC110V
5
S1
Brake voltage fixed/variable selection
Before adjusting voltage, turn ON all the jumper switches.
6
R1
Brake voltage adjustment resistance
If it is turned clockwise, voltage increases.
7
JP1
Holding output voltage Type selection
When 1-2 jumper is made, activation / holding voltage is generated.
8
F1
Brake input part fuse
250V / 5A
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 78 / 95
2. COP Panel Board 2.1 COP-30D Board COP Board
No.
Name
Description
Remark
1
Sound adjuster
It adjusts the size of the sound.
VR1
16
FUSE
It is destroyed when power cable is incorrectly connected.
FC1
5
COP button expansion
When it is connected to WCOP, button is expanded to 62nd floor.
CN_C6~8
14
Speaker connecting part
It is connected to the speaker for voice output.
CN_C5
23
DOT MATRIX
It displays floor and arrow.
It can be attached and detached.
12
Button drive
It drives button input and lamp output.
U10
15
Program input
It is used for program upgrade.
Need JTAG tool
11
Emergency battery connecting part
If COP power is not applied, 12VDC battery will be used.
CN_C11
30
LS Board connection
When it is connected to the LS Board
CN_C12
•
Connect WCOP62 board to No.5 CN_C8 when COP hall button is expanded (when 62nd floor is
•
Connect COP CLOSE / OPEN button to CU63 (DCB) and CU64 (DOB).
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 79 / 95
2.2 WCOP30 / WCOP62 Board It is used for Handicapped button input and button expansion. WCOP30 / WCOP62 Board
No.
Name
Description
Remark
2
COMM LED
It blinks when there is no problem on CAN COMM
LD1
3
11
4
Power / communication Connecting part
Usage setting SWITCH (SW1)
Button connecting part
PIN No.
Contents
3
1
P24
2
CAN H
CAN HIGH
3
CAN L
CAN LOW
4
N24
board power
ON
Usage
11
ALL OFF
Handicap button input 1
1
Handicap button input 2
1~30th floor, 31~62nd floor
2
MAIN COP button expansion
1~30th floor, 31~62nd floor
1, 2
SUB COP button expansion
1 ~ 30th floor
30 buttons are connected. (WCOP30) 62 buttons are connected. (WCOP62)
Power / communication Connecting part
Usage setting SWITCH (SW1)
The number of hall buttons is applied differently according to the usage setting.
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 80 / 95
15
UP lantern
UP lantern output in the Car
CN_W2
16
DOWN lantern
DOWN lantern output in the Car
CN_W3
10
Program input
It is connected and used for program UPDATE.
Need NU-LINK TOOL
•
Connect WCOP CLOSE / OPEN button to CU63 (DCB) and CU64 (DOB).
•
After setting JUMPER(J2), you need to turn power OFF -> ON to reflect the usage.
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 81 / 95
2.3 COP Load Connection and Voice Volume Adjustment Voice and Volume Adjustment in COP Board
No.
27
Name
DIP Switch
Description
Remark
SW No.
ON
OFF
Note
1
SUB
MAIN
OPB mode select
2
CTS / floor expansion
Disable
Expand floors to 62nd floor
3
ONLY BZ,CHM
ALL VOICE-
Select whether voice is output
4
REAR
Disable
Penetrate COP mode
5
-
-
(Reserved)
6
V update
Disable
Voice Update mode
7
V night
Disable
Night Voice mode
8
V test
Disable
Voice Test mode
Set the mode of COP
WBVF
2
1
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Load connector
Voice Volume Adjustment
PIN No.
Contents
1
N24
2
load 30%
B contact switch
3
load 70%
A contact switch
4
load 100%
A contact switch
5
load 110%
B contact switch
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 82 / 95
Remark
Turning to the right: Volume increases Turning to the left: Volume decreases
Connector Name: CC26 Load detection switch is on the floor of the Car.
VR1
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 83 / 95
2.4 HPI / CPI Indicator It is attached to the boarding floor (HPI) and upper part (CPI) of the Car to display elevator floor and status. HPI / CPI Board
No.
Name
Description
1
24V POW LED
When 24VDC is applied to the board power side, it is turned ON.
2
LIVE LED
It blinks when there is no problem with CAN COMM
3
4 5
Power / communication connecting part Button connecting part Hall chime / hall lantern
Remark It is OFF when there is a problem. It does not blink when there is a problem.
Connect for 24VDC and CAN communication.
CH1, CH4
Connect the button for Car call of the corresponding floor.
CH2, CH2B
Connect when hall chime / hall lantern is used.
CH3
10
Program input
Connect and apply for program UPDATE.
J1
6
PARKING input part
Connect cable at parking floor.
CH6
7
FMR input part
Connect to firefighter call (=FMR) switch.
CH7
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF 9
REARDIP switch
When JUMP is released, it works as REAR(=handicap) HIP.
11
Option LED
When the sticker is removed, you can verify LED status.
14
Floor setting mode (FL_SET)
When there is a JUMP, it enters floor ID input mode. (After completion, release JUMP and turn power OFF -> ON)
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 84 / 95
At normal time, JUMP is connected. When there is a problem check LED defect. Use Up/Down button to input floor ID.
•
Floor setting has the corresponding floor input at ship-out before delivery
•
to the site. Floor ID is fixed
•
For CPI, floor ID is set with『CP』, and for HPI, floor ID is set with『HP』,
•
and delivered to the site.
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 85 / 95
3. Boarding Hall Indicator PC Board 3.1 HIP PC Board Indicator Board
No.
Name
Description
Remark
2
FL_SET JUMPER
JUMP during the setting of the corresponding floor. When JUMP is reset, it operates as REAR (=handicap) HIP. It connects the button for the CAR call of the corresponding floor. It connects for 24VDC and CAN communication. It is connected when hall chime / hall lantern is used. It is connected and applied during the program UPDATE.
The currently set floor is displayed at JUMP. In normal times, JUMP is set.
11
REAR JUMPER
7
Button connection part
9
Power / communication connection part
8
Hall chime / Hall lantern
1
Program input
5
PARKING input part
It connects the cable at the parking floor.
CH6
6
FMR input part
It connects to the firefighter call (=FMR) switch.
CH7
CH2, CH2B CH1, CH4 CH5 or CH3 J1
Floor setting has the corresponding floor input at ship-out before delivering to the site.
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 86 / 95
3.2 GH5 PC Board Board for hall lantern and chime during the destination floor operation without a separate floor display and group operation GH5 Board
No.
Name
1
24V POW LED
2
LIVE LED
3
Power / communication connecting part
4
Button connecting part
5
Hall chime / hall lantern
10 6 7
Program input PARKING input part FMR input part
9
REAR jumper
14
External 110VAC power
15 16
Separate 110VAC lantern connecting part Separate 110VAC chime connecting part
Description
Remark
When 24VDC is applied to the board power side, it is turned ON. It blinks when there is no problem with CAN COMM. Connect for 24VDC and CAN communication. Connect the button to call the Car at the corresponding floor. Connect when hall chime / hall lantern is used. Connect and apply for program UPDATE. Connect the cable at parking floor. Connect to firefighter call (=FMR) switch. When JUMP is released, it works as REAR (=handicap) HIP. 110VAC power for external lantern and chime
It is OFF when there is a problem. It does not blink when there is a problem. CH1, CH4 CH2, CH2B CH3 Need NU-LINK TOOL Connect at lobby floor In normal time, JUMP is connected. Separate 110VAC power
External lantern should use 110VAC.
CH3 is not connected.
External chime should use 110VAC.
CH3 is not connected.
17
External 110VAC FUSE
It is destroyed when over-current is supplied.
Check when lantern is defective.
18
Floor setting DIP SWITCH
Input floor according to HEXA 8421 method.
ON / OFF adjustment
Floor setting has the corresponding floor input at ship-out before delivering to the site.
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 87 / 95
3.3 HIP/HPI/GH5 FIRE/PARKING SW Wiring
No.
Name
Description
Remark
1
CH6
PARKING SWITCH connecting part
Connect to Parking switch connector
2
CH7
FMR(=FIRE MAN RETURN) SWITCH connecting part
Connect to FMR switch connector
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF
2.0 2014-05-30 88 / 95
3.4 How to Set HIP / HPI Floor ID (For GH5, use DIP SWITCH in the board) Order
Contents
Note
Connect 24VDC power to the CH1 or CH4 of HIP / HPI Board Connect the UP / DOWN Button to the CH2 or CH2B of board
1 2 3
Jump the FL_SET(=JP3)
4
Input the floors according to the ID data of each floor by seeing the DOT-MATRIX display
5
Push the UP or DOWN Button during 5 sec
6
If you can see the alternating display 『OK』 and 『setting floor』 on the DOT-MATRIX, the floor setting is completed
Completed
7
Release FL_SET(=JP3) jumper
Release setting mode
Setting
The floor ID can be set from 1 to 96, the english display after 96 floor is special functions.
Floor ID
Set Floor ID
CP
In case that by using the CAR indicator
HP
In case of using 2 indicator on hall, one thing have to set as floor ID HP
SV
In case that by using the supervisor indicator
Note
When it Applies SUPERVISORY option
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 89 / 95
Refer to the following order included in the picture for better understanding! Example of Floor input) When you want to input『24』floor ID to HIP Order 3
Order 4,5
JUMP FL_SET
MAKE 17FL BY USING UP or DOWN BUTTON
Order 6
Order 7
Push the button during 5sec then check『OK』sign
Release FL_SET jumper
This work must be performed while JUMPER is connected to『FL_SET』. (Same for HPI / CPI)
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
4. CAR Junction Box PC Board 4.1 CTC Board
[Figure C.1 CTC Board] 4.2 CTX Board
[Figure C.2 CTX Board]
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 90 / 95
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Connector Name
CN_T2
Pin No.
Signal Name
Name and Function
1
B220S
220V power supply(Control Panel)
2
LITS
LIGHT output(22X)
3
FANS
FAN output (22X)
4
A220S
220V power supply(Control Panel)
5
FE
GND
6
22Y
220V power supply(building)
F7
CC17
CC18
CN_T3
TB1
7
CC23B
8
CC23
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
FUSE (250V, 5A) 1
22Y
220V power supply(building)
2
FE
GND
3
FAN
FAN power(22X),output
1
22Y
220V power supply(building)
2
FE
GND
3
LIT
LIGHT power(22X),output
1
ULA
ULA signal, output
2
DZ1
DZ1 signal, output
3
DZ2
DZ2 signal, output
4
DLA
DLA signal, output
5
N24
Control power (0V), input
6
N24
Control power (0V), input
7
P24
Control power (+24V), input
8
P24
Control power (+24V), input
1
PH1
Interphone signal 1
2
PH2
Interphone signal 2
3
PH3
Interphone signal 3
4
PH4
Interphone signal 4
1
P24
SAFTY RAY B power(+24V), output
2
N24
SAFTY RAY B power(0V), output
1
P24
SAFTY RAY A power(+24V), output
2
N24
SAFTY RAY A power(0V), output
[Table C.1 CTC Board Connector Description (1)]
2.0 2014-05-30 91 / 95
Remark
WBVF No.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Connector Name
CC24B
CC24
CN_T21
CN_T20
CC25
CC25B
CN_T19
CN_T11
CN7
CN8
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
Pin No.
Signal Name
Name and Function
1
P24
SAFTY RAY B control power(+24V), output
2
EE1
SAFTY RAY B control signal, input
3
N24
SAFTY RAY B control power(0V), output
1
EE1
SAFTY RAY B control signal, output
2
EE2
SAFTY RAY B control signal, input
3
N24
SAFTY RAY B control power(0V), output
1
ONS
Manual operation signal, input
2
ONU
Manual UP operation signal, input
3
OND
Manual DN operation signal, input
1
P24
Control power(+24V), output
2
ONS
Manual operation signal, input
3
OAT
Automatic operation signal, input
1
SE1
SAFTY EDGE B control signal, input
2
FE
GND
3
SE2
SAFTY EDGE B control signal, output
1
N24
Control power(0V), output
2
FE
GND
3
SE1
SAFTY EDGE A control signal, input
1
N24
Control power(0V), output
2
DOB
DOOR OPEN signal, input
3
DCB
DOOR CLOSE signal, input
1
P24
Control power(+24V), output
2
DFMR
FMR relay control output
3
DFR1
FR1 relay control output
1
P24
Control power(+24V), output
2
N24
Control power(0V), output
3
OPL
OPEN LIMIT signal, input
1
P24
Control power(+24V), output
2
N24
Control power(0V), output
3
CLL
CLOSE LIMIT signal, input
[Table C.2 CTC Board Connector Description (2)]
2.0 2014-05-30 92 / 95
Remark
WBVF
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
No.
Connector Name
19
S1
PUSH BUTTON (H/W RESET)
20
CN10
HHT
21
CN4
22
CN1
23
TAP1,2
24
F6
25
CC16
26
CN12
27
CN_T10
28
CN_T9
29
CN_T14
Pin No.
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
Signal Name
Name and Function
1
5V
Encoder power supply(+5V), output
2
GND
Encoder power supply(0V),output
3
AP
A phase P, input
4
AN
A phase N, input
5
BP
B phase P, input
6
BN
B phase N, input
7
-
-
8
-
DAC
GND
GND FUSE(250V,10A)
1
A220
220V power supply(Control Panel), input
2
B220
220V power supply(Control Panel), input
1
U
Inverter U phase, output
2
-
3
V
4
-
5
W
Inverter W phase, output
1
XTSP
SPARE input (I/O)
2
DTSP
SPARE output (I/O)
1
CCH
CAN communication, input/output
2
CCL
CAN communication, input/output
1
P24
Control power +24V, output
2
CCH
CAN communication, input/output
3
CCL
CAN communication, input/output
4
N24
Control power 0V, output
Inverter V phase, output
[Table C.3 CTC Board Connector Description (3)]
2.0 2014-05-30 93 / 95
Remark
WBVF No.
30
31
Connector Name
CN_T1
JP1
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
Pin No.
Signal Name
Name and Function
1
ULA
ULA signal, input
2
DZ1
DZ1 signal, input
3
DZ2
DZ2 signal, input
4
DLA
DLA signal, input
5
OAT
Automatic operation signal, input
6
ONU
Manual UP operation signal, input
7
OND
Manual DN operation signal, input
8
PH1
Interphone signal, input
9
PH2
Interphone signal, input
10
PH3
Interphone signal, input
11
PH4
Interphone signal, input
12
P24
Control power(+24V), output
13
N24
Control power(0V), output
1
ON
CAN communication end resistance is used.
2
COM
COMMOM connector
3
OFF
CAN communication end resistance is not used.
[Table C.4 CTC Board Connector Description (4)]
2.0 2014-05-30 94 / 95
Remark
A．INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
WBVF No.
32
Connector Name CN_T12
33
CC7
34
CC6
35
36
37
38
39
41
41
42
43
CN_T13
CC5
CC8
CC4B
CC4
CC28B
CC28
CN_T31
CC11
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
Pin No.
Signal Name
Name and Function
1
P24
Control power +24V
2
DFMR
FMR Relay activation output
3
DFR1
FR1 Relay activation output
1
COMP
COMP Fan rope HOOK switch
2
ESON
Car upper part E-STOP switch
1
SAFT
SAFTY device
2
COMP
COMP Fan rope HOOK switch
1
DFL
Lower part final limit switch
2
EXIT
Emergency rescue door switch
3
ESON
Car upper part E-STOP
4
GS2
Car door switch 2
5
SAFT
SAFTY device
1
SAFT
SAFTY device
2
FE
GND
3
DFL
Lower part final limit switch
1
ESON
Car upper part E-STOP
2
GND
GND
3
EXIT
Emergency rescue door switch
1
GS1
Car door switch 1
2
FE
GND
3
GS2
Car door switch 2
1
ESIN
E-STOP switch inside the Car
2
FE
GND
3
GS1
Car door switch 1
1
EL1
Emergency light power input(DC 12V or AC)
2
EL2
Emergency light power input(GND or AC)
1
EL1
Emergency light power output(DC 12V or AC)
2
EL2
Emergency light power output(GND or AC)
1
SPK1
BGM sound adjustment signal input
2
SPK2
BGM sound adjustment signal input
1
BGM
BGM sound adjustment signal output
2
SPK2
BGM sound adjustment signal output
3
FE
GND
[Table C.5 CTC Board Connector Description (5)]
2.0 2014-05-30 95 / 95
Remark
(LED or Incandescent lamp) (LED or Incandescent lamp)
WBVF
B. ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
Elevator Adjustment Manual
This manual is the property of Hyundai Elevator Co., Ltd and is loaned subject to return upon demand. Contents of this publication shall not be reproduced in any form without written permission of Hyundai Elevator Co., Ltd.
1.0 2013-08-24 1 / 23
WBVF
B. ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
1.0 2013-08-24 2 / 23
Contents
1. Control Panel PCB Board Adjustment
4
1.1. Main Board Adjustment
4
1.2. SAF Board Adjustment
6
1.3. VCON Board Adjustment
7
2. COP Panel Board Adjustment
8
2.1. COP-30D Board
8
2.2. WCOP30 / WCOP62 Board
9
2.3. COP Load Connection and Voice Volume Adjustment
10
2.4. HPI / CPI Inicator Setting
11
3. Boarding Floor Indicator PC Board
13
3.1. HIP PC Board
13
3.2. GH5 PC Board.
14
3.3. HIP/HPI/GH5 FIRE/PARKING SW Wiring
15
3.4. How to Set HIP / HPI Floor ID (For GH5, use DIP SWITCH in the board) 4. CAR J.BOX PC Board. Adjustment
16 18
4.1. CTC Board.
18
4.2. CTX Board.
18
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
B. ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
1.0 2013-08-21 3 / 23
◈ Introduction
The following icons in this manual are used to require caution in certain phrases. The following icons are used for safety warnings, cautions, and notes. 1WARNING: Warning mark tells you that an injury or product damage is predicted when the instructions are not correctly followed. 0CAUTION: Caution mark tells you that product damage is predicted when the instructions are not correctly followed. ☛NOTE: Note mark tells you some useful information or procedure.
The site worker in this manual is assumed to be a person skilled in elevator installations.
This manual is targeted for installation technicians who can completely install microprocessor based elevators. The site worker must be a person who is well aware of all the codes and rules applied to the operation and installation safety of the elevator system. ☛ NOTE: Control panel and elevator controller wiring work must be clean and well arranged. To prevent the short-circuit when the soft cables stick out of the terminal block, they must be worked as in entangled state.
You have to check appropriate arrangements and tightening
strengths of All controllers, site terminals, and cable connectors.
During the connection of flat
cable connectors, check the position of No.1 pin to prevent the damage of the parts. (The position of No.1 pin can be verified by an arrow mark on the connector or red color of the cable.) 0CAUTION: Only approved personnel may approach the elevator equipments and devices.
WBVF
B. ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
1.0 2013-08-24 4 / 23
1. Control Panel PC Board Adjustment 1WARNING: To replace PCB Bd., make sure to turn off the Main Power. ☛NOTE: The board’s settings are all set from the factory. Do not reset except for trouble shooting or replacement.
1.1. Main Board Adjustment
Figure 1: Main board
WBVF
B. ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
1.0 2013-08-21 5 / 23
(1) Main PC Board. power specification
CON
Pin
Name
1
VCC(+5V)
2
GND
3
-15V
4
+15V
Remark
CN1
MAIN POWER
(2) Check points after applying the power
LED
ITEM
Remark
LED1(POWER)
MAIN BD VCC supply verification signal
ON
LED2(WDT)
DSP Watch Dog verification signal
Blinking
LED3
DC LINK input verification signal
ON
LED4, LED5
CAN1 TX1, RX1 verification signal
Blinking
LED6, LED7
CAN2 TX2, RX2 verification signal
Blinking
☛NOTE: In normal operation, LED1 and LED3 are ON, and LED2, LED4, LED5, LED6, and LED7 are blinking.
WBVF
B. ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
1.0 2013-08-24 6 / 23
1.2. SAF Board Adjustment
SAF Board
No.
Name
Description
Remark
1
CN_S1
Control Panel emergency stop
2
CN_S2
Feet safety line
3
CN_S3
Governor (for terminal block wiring)
4
CN_S4
Upper part final limit
Site wiring(hoist way)
5
CN_S5
Lower part final limit
Site wiring(hoist way)
6
CN_S6
Boarding floor door
Site wiring(interlock)
7
CN_S7
Boarding floor door
Site wiring(interlock)
8
CN_S8
Car safety line
Site wiring(T-CABLE)
9
CN_S9
For electrical emergency operation jumper
10
CN_S11
For SAF board power
11
CN_S12
For safety relay fuse inspection
12
CN_S13
For safety line monitoring
13
CN_S14
MRL external input/output signal connection
14
CN_S19A
Installed vane signal
15
CN_S19B
Installed vane signal
Site wiring(feet)
Site wiring(T-CABLE)
WBVF
B. ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
1.0 2013-08-21 7 / 23
1.3. VCON Board Adjustment
VCON Board
No.
Name
Description
Remark
1
CN_V1
Brake control power input
AC220V(for rectification) / DC24V(for control)
2
CN_V2
Brake output power
DC90~DC160
3
CN_V3
Safety line AC85V input
AC85V
4
CN_V4
Safety line DC110V output
DC110V
5
S1
6
R1
7
JP1
Brake voltage fixed/variable selection Brake voltage adjustment resistance Holding output voltage Type selection
Before adjusting voltage, turn ON all the jumper switches. If it is turned clockwise, voltage increases. When 1-2 jumper is made, activation / holding voltage is generated.
8
F1
Brake input part fuse
250V / 5A
WBVF
B. ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
1.0 2013-08-24 8 / 23
2. COP Panel Board Adjustment 2.1. COP-30D Board COP Board
No.
Name
Description
Remark
1
Sound adjuster
It adjusts the size of the sound.
VR1
16
FUSE
It is destroyed when power cable is incorrectly connected.
FC1
5
COP button expansion
When it is connected to WCOP, button is expanded to 62nd floor.
CN_C6~8
14
Speaker connecting part
It is connected to the speaker for voice output.
CN_C5
23
DOT MATRIX
It displays floor and arrow.
It can be attached and detached.
12
Button drive
It drives button input and lamp output.
U10
15
Program input
It is used for program upgrade.
Need JTAG tool
11
Emergency battery connecting part
If COP power is not applied, 12VDC battery will be used.
CN_C11
30
LS Board connection
When it is connected to the LS Board
CN_C12
☛ NOTE: 1. When COP floor button is expanded, (when 62nd floor is applied), connect WCOP62 board to No.5 CN_C8. 2. Connect COP CLOSE / OPEN button to CU63(DCB) and CU64(DOB).
WBVF
B. ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
1.0 2013-08-21 9 / 23
2.2. WCOP30 / WCOP62 Board - It is used for handicap button input and button expansion. WCOP30 / WCOP62 Board
No.
Name
Description
Remark
2
COMM LED
It blinks when there is no problem on CAN COMM
LD1
3
11
Power / communication Connecting part
Usage setting SWITCH (SW1)
PIN No.
Contents
3
1
P24
2
CAN H
CAN HIGH
3
CAN L
CAN LOW
4
N24
board power
ON
Usage
11
ALL OFF
Handicap button input 1
1
Handicap button input 2
1~30th floor, 31~62nd floor
2
MAIN COP button expansion
1~30th floor, 31~62nd floor
1, 2
SUB COP button expansion
1 ~ 30th floor
Power / communication Connecting part
Usage setting SWITCH (SW1)
4
Button connecting part
30 buttons are connected. (WCOP30) 62 buttons are connected. (WCOP62)
The number of hall buttons is applied differently according to the usage setting.
15
UP lantern
UP lantern output in the Car
CN_W2
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
B. ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
1.0 2013-08-24 10 / 23
16
DOWN lantern
DOWN lantern output in the Car
CN_W3
10
Program input
It is connected and used for program UPDATE.
Need NU-LINK TOOL
☛ NOTE: Connect WCOP CLOSE / OPEN button to CU63(DCB) and CU64(DOB). After setting JUMPER(J2), you need to turn power OFF -> ON to reflect the usage.
2.3. COP Load Connection and Voice Volume Adjustment Voice and Volume Adjustment in COP Board
No.
27
Name
DIP Switch
Description
Remark
SW No.
ON
OFF
Note
1
SUB
MAIN
OPB mode select
2
CTS / floor expansion
Disable
Expand floors to 62nd floor
3
ONLY BZ,CHM
ALL VOICE-
Select whether voice is output
Set the mode of COP
WBVF
2
1
Load connector
Voice Volume Adjustment
B. ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
4
REAR
Disable
Penetrate COP mode
5
-
-
(Reserved)
6
V update
Disable
Voice Update mode
7
V night
Disable
Night Voice mode
8
V test
Disable
Voice Test mode
PIN No.
Contents
1
N24
2
load 30%
B contact switch
3
load 70%
A contact switch
4
load 100%
A contact switch
5
load 110%
B contact switch
1.0 2013-08-21 11 / 23
Remark
Turning to the right: Volume increases Turning to the left: Volume decreases
Connector Name: CC26 Load detection switch is on the floor of the Car.
VR1
2.4. HPI / CPI Indicator Setting - It is attached to the boarding floor(HPI) and upper part(CPI) of the Car to display elevator floor and status. HPI / CPI Board
WBVF
B. ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
No.
Name
Description
1
24V POW LED
When 24VDC is applied to the board power side, it is turned ON.
2
LIVE LED
It blinks when there is no problem with CAN COMM
3
4 5
Power / communication connecting part Button connecting part Hall chime / hall lantern
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
1.0 2013-08-24 12 / 23
Remark It is OFF when there is a problem. It does not blink when there is a problem.
Connect for 24VDC and CAN communication.
CH1, CH4
Connect the button for Car call of the corresponding floor.
CH2, CH2B
Connect when hall chime / hall lantern is used.
CH3
10
Program input
Connect and apply for program UPDATE.
J1
6
PARKING input part
Connect cable at parking floor.
CH6
7
FMR input part
Connect to firefighter call (=FMR) switch.
CH7
9
REARDIP switch
When JUMP is released, it works as REAR(=handicap) HIP.
11
Option LED
When the sticker is removed, you can verify LED status.
At normal time, JUMP is connected. When there is a problem check LED defect.
14
Floor setting mode (FL_SET)
When there is a JUMP, it enters floor ID input mode. (After completion, release JUMP and turn power OFF -> ON)
Use Up/Down button to input floor ID.
☛ NOTE: Floor setting has the corresponding floor input at ship-out before delivery to the site. (Floor ID is fixed.) For CPI, floor ID is set with『CP』, and for HPI, floor ID is set with『HP』, and delivered to the site.
WBVF
B. ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
1.0 2013-08-21 13 / 23
3. Boarding hall Indicator PC Board. 3.1. HIP PC Board Indicator Board
No.
Name
Description
Remark
2
FL_SET JUMPER
JUMP during the setting of the corresponding floor. When JUMP is reset, it operates as REAR (=handicap) HIP. It connects the button for the CAR call of the corresponding floor. It connects for 24VDC and CAN communication. It is connected when hall chime / hall lantern is used. It is connected and applied during the program UPDATE.
The currently set floor is displayed at JUMP. In normal times, JUMP is set.
11
REAR JUMPER
7
Button connection part
9
Power / communication connection part
8
Hall chime / Hall lantern
1
Program input
5
PARKING input part
It connects the cable at the parking floor.
CH6
6
FMR input part
It connects to the firefighter call (=FMR) switch.
CH7
CH2, CH2B CH1, CH4 CH5 or CH3 J1
☛ NOTE: Floor setting has the corresponding floor input at ship-out before the deliver to the site.
WBVF
B. ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
1.0 2013-08-24 14 / 23
3.2. GH5 PC Board. - Board for hall lantern and chime during the destination floor operation without a separate floor display and group operation GH5 Board
No.
Name
1
24V POW LED
2
LIVE LED
3
Power / communication connecting part
4
Button connecting part
5
Hall chime / hall lantern
10 6 7
Program input PARKING input part FMR input part
9
REAR jumper
14
External 110VAC power
15 16
Separate 110VAC lantern connecting part Separate 110VAC chime connecting part
Description
Remark
When 24VDC is applied to the board power side, it is turned ON. It blinks when there is no problem with CAN COMM. Connect for 24VDC and CAN communication. Connect the button to call the Car at the corresponding floor. Connect when hall chime / hall lantern is used. Connect and apply for program UPDATE. Connect the cable at parking floor. Connect to firefighter call (=FMR) switch. When JUMP is released, it works as REAR (=handicap) HIP. 110VAC power for external lantern and chime
It is OFF when there is a problem. It does not blink when there is a problem. CH1, CH4 CH2, CH2B CH3 Need NU-LINK TOOL Connect at lobby floor In normal time, JUMP is connected. Separate 110VAC power
External lantern should use 110VAC.
CH3 is not connected.
External chime should use 110VAC.
CH3 is not connected.
17
External 110VAC FUSE
It is destroyed when over-current is supplied.
Check when lantern is defective.
18
Floor setting DIP SWITCH
Input floor according to HEXA 8421 method.
ON / OFF adjustment
☛ NOTE: Floor setting has the corresponding floor input at ship-out before the deliver to the site.
WBVF
B. ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
1.0 2013-08-21 15 / 23
3.3. HIP/HPI/GH5 FIRE/PARKING SW Wiring
No.
Name
Description
1
CH6
PARKING SWITCH connecting part
2
CH7
FMR(=FIRE MAN RETURN) SWITCH connecting part
Remark Connect to Parking switch connector Connect to FMR switch connector
WBVF
B. ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
1.0 2013-08-24 16 / 23
3.4. How to Set HIP / HPI Floor ID (For GH5, use DIP SWITCH in the board) Order
Contents
Note
Connect 24VDC power to the CH1 or CH4 of HIP / HPI Board Connect the UP / DOWN Button to the CH2 or CH2B of board
1 2 3
Jump the FL_SET(=JP3)
4
Input the floors according to the ID data of each floor by seeing the DOT-MATRIX display
5
Push the UP or DOWN Button during 5 sec
6
If you can see the alternating display 『OK』 and 『setting floor』 on the DOT-MATRIX, the floor setting is completed
Completed
7
Release FL_SET(=JP3) jumper
Release setting mode
Setting
The floor ID can be set from 1 to 96, the English display after 96 floor is special functions.
Floor ID
Set Floor ID
CP
In case that by using the CAR indicator
HP
In case of using 2 indicator on hall, one thing have to set as floor ID HP
SV
In case that by using the supervisor indicator
Note
When it Applies SUPERVISORY option
WBVF
B. ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
1.0 2013-08-21 17 / 23
☛ NOTE: For better understanding, refer to the following figure of order. Example of floor input) When you want to input『17』floor ID to HIP: Order 1
Order 2
Use Up/Down button to stop at floor『17』
Push the button during 5sec then check 『OK』 sign
Order 3
Order 4
If they are properly input, the input floor and『OK』 are displayed in turn. ☛ NOTE: This work must be performed while JUMPER is connected to『FL_SET』.
(Same for HPI / CPI)
WBVF
B. ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
4. CAR JUNCTION BOX PC BOARD Adjustment 4.1. CTC Board
Figure 6: CTC BOARD
4.2. CTX Board
Figure 7: CTX BOARD
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
1.0 2013-08-24 18 / 23
WBVF
B. ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
1.0 2013-08-21 19 / 23
TABLE 1: CTC BOARD connector description (1)
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Connector Name
Pin No.
Signal Name
Name and Function
1
B220S
220V power supply(Control Panel)
2
LITS
LIGHT output(22X)
3
FANS
FAN output (22X)
4
A220S
220V power supply(Control Panel)
5
FE
GND
6
22Y
220V power supply(building)
CN_T2
F7
CC17
CC18
FUSE (250V, 5A) 1
22Y
220V power supply(building)
2
FE
GND
3
FAN
FAN power(22X),output
1
22Y
220V power supply(building)
2
FE
GND
3
LIT
LIGHT power(22X),output
1
ULA
ULA signal, output
2
DZ1
DZ1 signal, output
3
DZ2
DZ2 signal, output
4
DLA
DLA signal, output
5
N24
Control power (0V), input
6
N24
Control power (0V), input
7
P24
Control power (+24V), input
8
P24
Control power (+24V), input
1
PH1
Interphone signal 1
2
PH2
Interphone signal 2
3
PH3
Interphone signal 3
4
PH4
Interphone signal 4
1
P24
SAFTY RAY B power(+24V), output
2
N24
SAFTY RAY B power(0V), output
1
P24
SAFTY RAY A power(+24V), output
2
N24
SAFTY RAY A power(0V), output
CN_T3
TB1
CC23B
CC23
Remark
WBVF
B. ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
1.0 2013-08-24 20 / 23
TABLE 2: CTC BOARD connector description (2)
No.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Connector Name
CC24B
CC24
CN_T21
CN_T20
CC25
CC25B
CN_T19
CN_T11
CN7
CN8
Pin No.
Signal Name
Name and Function
1
P24
SAFTY RAY B control power(+24V), output
2
EE1
SAFTY RAY B control signal, input
3
N24
SAFTY RAY B control power(0V), output
1
EE1
SAFTY RAY B control signal, output
2
EE2
SAFTY RAY B control signal, input
3
N24
SAFTY RAY B control power(0V), output
1
ONS
Manual operation signal, input
2
ONU
Manual UP operation signal, input
3
OND
Manual DN operation signal, input
1
P24
Control power(+24V), output
2
ONS
Manual operation signal, input
3
OAT
Automatic operation signal, input
1
SE1
SAFTY EDGE B control signal, input
2
FE
GND
3
SE2
SAFTY EDGE B control signal, output
1
N24
Control power(0V), output
2
FE
GND
3
SE1
SAFTY EDGE A control signal, input
1
N24
Control power(0V), output
2
DOB
DOOR OPEN signal, input
3
DCB
DOOR CLOSE signal, input
1
P24
Control power(+24V), output
2
DFMR
FMR relay control output
3
DFR1
FR1 relay control output
1
P24
Control power(+24V), output
2
N24
Control power(0V), output
3
OPL
OPEN LIMIT signal, input
1
P24
Control power(+24V), output
2
N24
Control power(0V), output
3
CLL
CLOSE LIMIT signal, input
Remark
WBVF
B. ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
1.0 2013-08-21 21 / 23
TABLE 3: CTC BOARD connector description (3)
No.
Connector Name
19
S1
PUSH BUTTON (H/W RESET)
20
CN10
HHT
21
CN1
23
TAP1,2
24
F6
25
CC16
27
28
29
Signal Name
Name and Function
1
5V
Encoder power supply(+5V), output
2
GND
Encoder power supply(0V),output
3
AP
A phase P, input
4
AN
A phase N, input
5
BP
B phase P, input
6
BN
B phase N, input
7
-
-
8
-
-
CN4
22
26
Pin No.
CN12
DAC GND
GND FUSE(250V,10A)
1
A220
220V power supply(Control Panel), input
2
B220
220V power supply(Control Panel), input
1
U
Inverter U phase, output
2
-
3
V
4
-
5
W
Inverter W phase, output
1
XTSP
SPARE input (I/O)
2
DTSP
SPARE output (I/O)
1
CCH
CAN communication, input/output
2
CCL
CAN communication, input/output
1
P24
Control power +24V, output
2
CCH
CAN communication, input/output
3
CCL
CAN communication, input/output
4
N24
Control power 0V, output
Inverter V phase, output
CN_T10
CN_T9
CN_T14
Remark
WBVF
B. ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
1.0 2013-08-24 22 / 23
TABLE 4: CTC BOARD connector description (4)
No.
30
31
Connector Name
CN_T1
JP1
Pin No.
Signal Name
Name and Function
1
ULA
ULA signal, input
2
DZ1
DZ1 signal, input
3
DZ2
DZ2 signal, input
4
DLA
DLA signal, input
5
OAT
Automatic operation signal, input
6
ONU
Manual UP operation signal, input
7
OND
Manual DN operation signal, input
8
PH1
Interphone signal, input
9
PH2
Interphone signal, input
10
PH3
Interphone signal, input
11
PH4
Interphone signal, input
12
P24
Control power(+24V), output
13
N24
Control power(0V), output
1
ON
CAN communication end resistance is used.
2
COM
COMMOM connector
3
OFF
CAN communication end resistance is not used.
Remark
WBVF
B. ADJUSTMENT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
1.0 2013-08-21 23 / 23
TABLE 5: CTX BOARD connector description
No.
32
Connector Name
CN_T12
33
CC7
34
CC6
35
36
37
38
39
CN_T13
CC5
CC8
CC4B
CC4
41
CC28B
41
CC28
42
43
CN_T31
CC11
Pin No.
Signal Name
Name and Function
1
P24
Control power +24V
2
DFMR
FMR Relay activation output
3
DFR1
FR1 Relay activation output
1
COMP
COMP Fan rope HOOK switch
2
ESON
Car upper part E-STOP switch
1
SAFT
SAFTY device
2
COMP
COMP Fan rope HOOK switch
1
DFL
Lower part final limit switch
2
EXIT
Emergency rescue door switch
3
ESON
Car upper part E-STOP
4
GS2
Car door switch 2
5
SAFT
SAFTY device
1
SAFT
SAFTY device
2
FE
GND
3
DFL
Lower part final limit switch
1
ESON
Car upper part E-STOP
2
GND
GND
3
EXIT
Emergency rescue door switch
1
GS1
Car door switch 1
2
FE
GND
3
GS2
Car door switch 2
1
ESIN
E-STOP switch inside the Car
2
FE
GND
3
GS1
Car door switch 1
1
EL1
Emergency light power input(DC 12V or AC)
2
EL2
1
EL1
Emergency light power input(GND or AC) Emergency light power output(DC 12V or AC)
2
EL2
Emergency light power output(GND or AC)
1
SPK1
BGM sound adjustment signal input
2
SPK2
BGM sound adjustment signal input
1
BGM
BGM sound adjustment signal output
2
SPK2
BGM sound adjustment signal output
3
FE
GND
Remark
(LED or Incandescent lamp) (LED or Incandescent lamp)
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
Elevator Motor Drive Unit Manual
This manual is the property of Hyundai Elevator Co., Ltd. and is loaned subject to return upon demand. Contents of this publication should not be reproduced in any form without written permission of Hyundai Elevator Co., Ltd..
2.0 2014-05-30 1 / 60
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
REVISION
NO.
ITEM
Specification
DATE
0
First Edition
2013.08.24
1
Edit the format
2013.11.05
2
Reorganization of the manual
2014.05.30
Manager
2.0 2014-05-30 2 / 60
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 3 / 60
Table of Contents
Safety Information ............................................................................................................................. 5 1.
Preparations for Motor Drive ...................................................................................................... 6 1.1 Major Safety Information for WBVF Inverter ............................................................................ 6 1.2 System Connection and Test Run Directions .......................................................................... 6
2.
Inverter Composition .................................................................................................................. 7 2.1 Power Stack ............................................................................................................................ 7 2.2 Control Board .......................................................................................................................... 9 2.2.1 Main Board Structure ........................................................................................................ 9 2.2.2 Encoder Board ................................................................................................................ 13 2.2.3 SMPS Board ................................................................................................................... 15
3.
How to Set HHT ....................................................................................................................... 16 3.1 HHT Display .......................................................................................................................... 16 3.2 HHT Button and Menu Structure ........................................................................................... 17 3.2.1 Button Structure .............................................................................................................. 17 3.2.2 Select Menu .................................................................................................................... 17
4.
HHT Menu Description ............................................................................................................. 18 4.1 Menu Category ...................................................................................................................... 18 4.2 Monitor Menu......................................................................................................................... 19 4.2.1 Basic ............................................................................................................................... 19 4.2.2 I/O Menu Composition .................................................................................................... 24 4.2.3 Error Composition ........................................................................................................... 25 4.2.4 Floor Data ....................................................................................................................... 31 4.3 Program Menu ....................................................................................................................... 33 4.3.1 Control............................................................................................................................. 33
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 4 / 60
4.3.2 Interface .......................................................................................................................... 40 4.3.3 Motor ............................................................................................................................... 42 4.3.4 Factory ............................................................................................................................ 52 Appendix 1. Start-up Time Chart (Operation Mode is the Same) ................................................... 56 Appendix 2. Inverter Recording Categories .................................................................................... 57 Appendix 3. Current Sensing Resistances and Current Sensor ..................................................... 58 Appendix 4. Motor Parameter ......................................................................................................... 59
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 5 / 60
Safety Information IMPORTANT! READ SAFETY NOTE AND THIS PAGE CAREFULLY before installation •
When it comes to Installation and Commissioning, Person passing through training course and having a certification provided by Hyundai Elevator co., LTD. is qualified to make a procedure.
•
Wear safety devices
•
Check and remove unnecessary projected parts
•
Check the safety shelter plate installation at the floor side door part for the operation of the car
•
No one but the approved personnel is authorized to have access to elevator equipment and devices
•
Clean up and arrange the control board and elevator controller connecting wires. Stranded wires must be twisted before works to prevent SHORT CIRCUIT that may occur when sticking out from the terminal block.
•
Check if all controllers, field terminals and cable connectors are properly arranged and tightened or not
•
Check the location of Pin No.1 to prevent COMPONENTS DAMAGE, In case of connecting a flat cable connector. (The location of Pin No.1 is traceable by using the arrow mark of the connector or the red line of the cable).
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 6 / 60
1. Preparations for Motor Drive IMPORTANT! READ SAFETY NOTE AND THIS PAGE CAREFULLY before installation 1.1 Major Safety Information for WBVF Inverter •
WBVF inverter is designed to be suitable for elevator, it may not be used for other purposes. The manufacturer is not responsible for the damage caused by using this device on unintended part. In such case, the user has to take the risks.
•
WBVF inverter should be used inside a building.
The operation of this device in an explosive environment is prohibited.
1.2 System Connection and Test Run Directions •
The elevator should be operated while appropriate safety is verified.
•
When the motor is activated for the first time, for effective power disconnection, install a blocking device, the installer must verify the location of the blocking device, and parts that may bring danger to the work should be removed.
•
The rotating part of the motor has the risk of accident, so other people should be at a safe distance from the motor or operated machine.
•
During the test operation, for example, motor may operate in an unexpected way due to incorrect parameter or wrong wiring, etc., and danger may be caused by rotation in the unexpected direction, excessive speed, or by shaking. Precise setting must be done by referring to the manual and specification, etc., and such wrongdoing may cause damage to the machine.
•
Service and repair works must be performed by qualified personnel.
•
Before opening the INVERTER, block main power supply connections in all phases, and wait for at least 20 minutes for the remaining D.C voltage to be discharged completely by itself.
•
During the repair, motor must be in a stopped state, and power should be blocked to prevent the danger of reactivation.
•
Power and control voltage connection must be removed when you have to inspect the connection.
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2. Inverter Composition 2.1 Power Stack Power Stack is classified to 5.5, 7.5, 11, and 15kW.
Inverter Gate Board
Current Sensing Board
FUSE
[Figure 2.1 Exterior shape diagram of WB100G/GT STACK]
2.0 2014-05-30 7 / 60
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
Inverter Gate Board
Converter Gate Board Current Sensing Board
FUSE
Heatsink ASS'Y
Terminal Block ASSY
[Figure 2.2 Exterior shape diagram of WB200G/GT STACK]
2.0 2014-05-30 8 / 60
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 9 / 60
2.2 Control Board 2.2.1 Main Board Structure
HHT
Inverter Gate
HRTS
Main Power(DC 5V)
RMS DC voltage CAR CAN
sensing signal
HALL CAN
OPTION BOARD Current sensing
Digital Output
Download connector D/A
ENCODER BOARD Digital Input
Encoder Power
Encoder
Safety line signal Upper part forced deceleration Switch Lower part forced deceleration Switch
VANE signal
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 10 / 60
HHT Inverter Gate
HRTS
Main Power(DC 5V)
CAR CAN DC voltage CAR CAN
HALL CAN
sensing signal
OPTION BOARD Current sensing
Digital Output
Download connector
D/A
ENCODER BOARD Digital Input
Encoder
Upper part forced deceleration Switch Lower part forced deceleration Switch
Safety line signal VANE signal
WBVF 1)
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 11 / 60
Main Board Connector Names CN
Item
Remark
CN1
MAIN POWER
Main board power
CN2
JTAG
JTAG connector
CN3
SCI
Control board monitoring
CN4
EzPort
Control board Download connector
CN5
OPTION BOARD
OPTION BOARD connector
CN6
GATE
GATE SIGNAL input/output
CN7
ENCODER
ENCODER BOARD connector
CN8
LOAD INPUT
LOAD input(not used)
CN9
INVERTER CURRENT SENSING
Inverter current sensing
CN10
INPUT DC-LINK SENSING
DC LINK voltage sensing
CN11
CAN1
CAR CAN communication
CN12
CAN2
HALL CAN communication
CN13
D/A Converter
D/A output
CN14
RS232
HRTS
CN15
RS-485(only version 1.0)
RS 485 communication(monitoring panel)
CN16
KEYPAD
Key-Pad(HHT) connector
CN17
INPUT
Lower part forced deceleration switch
CN18
INPUT
Upper part forced deceleration switch
CN19
INPUT
Vane sensor
CN20
INPUT
Safety line monitoring
CN21
INPUT
Control input signal
CN22
OUTPUT
Control output signal
CN23
CAN1(only version 1.1)
CAR CAN communication
WBVF 2)
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Main Board Power Specifications CN
CN1
3)
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
PIN
Item
1
VCC(+5V)
2
GND
3
-15V
4
+15V
Remark
Main board power
Check Points after Supplying Main Board Power LED
Item
Remark
LED1
VCC(+5V) check signal
ON
LED2
Watch Dog check signal
Blinking
LED3
DC Link input check signal
ON
LED4,LED5
CAR CAN blinking signal
Blinking
LED6,LED7
HALL CAN blinking signal
Blinking
2.0 2014-05-30 12 / 60
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 13 / 60
2.2.2 Encoder Board 1)
Types and structure of encoder boards
•
For Synchronous motor
Encoder
Board
Encoder Power
Encoder
Connector
Item
CN1
Encoder connector
CN2
Encoder power
CN1
Encoder connector
CN2
Encoder power
Encoder Power
Remark
SINCOS encoder +5V
INCREMENTAL encoder +5V
WBVF •
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 14 / 60
For Induction motor
Motor Thermal
Encoder Power
Encoder
Connector
Item
Remark
CN1
Encoder connector
Refer to connector silk for the name of each signal
CN2
Encoder power
+15V
CN4
MOTOR THEMAL
Motor temperature sensor
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
2.0 2014-05-30 15 / 60
2.2.3 SMPS Board
DC-Link Voltage
SMPS
Sensing
P, N input
Gate Board
SCR Power
power Encoder power Main Board power
Connector
Item
Remark
CN1
SMPS input power(DC)
CN2
DC Link Voltage Sensing voltage
CN3
Main Board power
5V, ±15V
CN4
Gate Board power
24V
CN5
SCR input power
5V
CN6
Encoder power
Synchronous motor:5V, Induction motor:15V
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
3. How to Set HHT 3.1 HHT Display
5 (B1) 09:45:35 Auto_Drive RUN_UP
ENT
ENT
ENT
ESC
[Figure 2.1 HHT Initial Display]
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 16 / 60
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
2.0 2014-05-30 17 / 60
Refer to the System Manual for the categories on operation information.
3.2 HHT Button and Menu Structure 3.2.1 Button Structure
UP
•
•
ENT
DN
Move between menu •
Move between menu •
Select menu
categories
categories
category
Change data
•
Change data
•
Data input
ESC
•
Move to upper level menu
•
Cancel data
3.2.2 Select Menu After placing the arrow on the selected category, if you press ENT key, it moves to the selected category, and if you press ESC key, it moves to the upper level menu.
ENT
ESC
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 18 / 60
4. HHT Menu Description 4.1 Menu Category Menu Structure
Item
Remark
BASIC
Various Display categories
I/O
Input, output signal
ERROR
Inverter error
FLOOR
Floor information and forced deceleration switch position
CONTROL
Elevator speed and control information
INTERFACE
Operation signal interface
MOTOR
Motor information
FACTORY
Factory default information
MONITOR
PROGRAM
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
2.0 2014-05-30 19 / 60
4.2 Monitor Menu 4.2.1 Basic 1)
Basic Menu Composition
•
Synchronous Motor
Classification
Basic Name
Unit
Synchronous motor/Induction motor
WBST PMSM Ver
Basic List
Detail Description
classification and
program version
SPEED FBK
rpm
Actual speed of Motor
SPEED REF
rpm
Reference speed of Motor
CURRENT
A
INVERTER current(r.m.s)
VOLTAGE
V
INVERTER voltage(r.m.s)
DC LINK VOLT
V
DC LINK Voltage
ROTOR POSITION
V
Judging initial angle error
IU CURRENT
A
INVERTER U phase current(peak)
IV CURRENT
A
INVERTER V phase current(peak)
IW CURRENT
A
INVERTER W phase current(peak) Number of pulses in the load compensation
LOAD PULSE
device
FLOOR
F
Current floor
CALL
F
Service floor
DRIVE MODE INITIAL
PLDL POS
Operation mode Judging whether overall height measurement is completed Judging whether PLUL and PLDL positions
[Table 4.1 Basic List of Synchronous Motor]
are correct
WBVF •
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 20 / 60
Induction Motor
Classification
Basic Name
Unit
Synchronous motor/Induction motor
WBST IND Ver
Basic List
Detail Description
classification and program version
SPEED FBK
rpm
Actual speed of Motor
SPEED REF
rpm
Reference speed of Motor
CURRENT
A
INVERTER current(r.m.s)
VOLTAGE
V
INVERTER voltage(r.m.s)
DC LINK VOLT
V
DC LINK Voltage
MOTOR TEMP
Motor temperature
FLOOR
F
Current floor
CALL
F
Service floor
DRIVE MODE INITIAL
PLDL POS
Operation mode Judging whether overall height measurement is completed Judging whether PLUL and PLDL positions
[Table 4.2 Basic List of Induction motor]
are correct
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
2)
Basic Menu Detail Description
•
WBST PMSM Ver It shows the version of inverter program.
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
•
PMSM is the program for Synchronous motor.
•
IND is the program for Induction motor.
•
Speed REF It shows the reference speed of the motor.
•
Speed FBK
•
Current
It shows the actual current of the motor in r.m.s.
•
Voltage
It shows the actual voltage of the motor in r.m.s.
•
DC Link Volt
2.0 2014-05-30 21 / 60
It shows the actual speed of the motor.
It shows the inverter DC LINK voltage. It is calculated as the following formula
according to the input voltage. DC LINK voltage = input voltage ×
(Formula)
If the converter is in operation, DC LINK voltage increases, and it is shown as the following table according to the input voltage.
Input voltage
DC LINK voltage
380V
537V
440V
622V
480V
678V
[Table 4.3 DC LINK voltage according to input voltage] If there is an error of ±10V or more between DC LINK VOLT value of HHT and actual DC LINK VOLT value (input voltage ×
), decrease the error boundary
by changing FACTORY 02.DC LINK SCALE value. Set FACTORY 02.INPUT VOLT value according to input voltage.
WBVF •
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
2.0 2014-05-30 22 / 60
Rotor Position (Synchronous Motor) As initial angle error gets bigger, ROTOR POSITION value increases during the driving. If this value is 50 or more during the automatic fixed speed driving, inverter may malfunction, so set the initial angle again. If it is manual fixed speed driving, set the initial angle to be within
. To set the initial
angle, in manual mode, change MOTOR U ANGLE value in the units of 0.1, reset main board, and see if ROTOR POSITION value is within
.
Check Rotor Value after motor rotated at least 1 time.
•
IU Current(Synchronous Motor)
It shows the actual U phase current of the motor in peak.
•
IV Current(Synchronous Motor)
It shows the actual V phase current of the motor in peak.
•
IW Current(Synchronous Motor) It shows the actual W phase current of the motor in peak.
•
Motor Temp(Induction Motor)
•
Load Pulse(Synchronous Motor)
It shows the temperature of the motor. It shows the value of weight of the load sensor converted to
the number of pulses. •
Floor
•
Call
•
Drive Mode
It shows the current floor. It shows the service floor.
Operation Mode
It shows the operation mode. ID
Remark
AUTO
Automatic operation
INITIAL
Overall height measured
INSPECT
Manual operation
PLO
Nearest floor operation
RELEVEL
Relevel operation
60MM DRIVE
60MM operation
LOW SPEED
LOW operation
ELD DRIVE
ELD
STOP
Stop
[Table 4.4 Operation Mode]
WBVF •
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 23 / 60
Initial It shows overall height measurement operation completed signal. If it is normal, it is displayed as “OK”.
•
PLDL POS When the overall height measurement operation signal is input, if forced deceleration signal (PLDL, PLDH, PLUL, PLUH) position is correct, it is displayed as “OK”. (If it is “FAIL”, automatic operation is impossible.)
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
4.2.2 I/O Menu Composition 1)
Input / Output
It shows input and output signals.
Input
Output
Bit
Remark
F
Forward driving signal
R
Reverse driving signal
A
Auto operation
r
Inverter reset signal
W
Control panel watchdog
L
PLDL
M
PLDM
H
PLDH
l
PLUL
m
PLUM
h
PLUH
Z
ZSP(Zero Speed)
B
BKO(Brake OUT)
R
RUN(Inverter Run)
F
Inverter Fault
M
Inverter Relay
2.0 2014-05-30 24 / 60
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 25 / 60
4.2.3 Error Composition Error
Keypad Display
Contents
IGBT failure
IGBT FAULT
Inverter IGBT failure
INVERTER over-current
OC FAULT
Inverter over-current occurred
DC LINK over-voltage
OV FAULT
DC Link over-voltage occurred
DC LINK low voltage
UV FAULT
DC Link low voltage occurred
Overload error
INV OV LOAD
Inverter overload occurred
Over-speed error
OVER SPEED
Inverter over-speed error occurred
Initialization error
VERSION ERR
Initialization error
Speed not-matching error
SPD DISAGR
Motor overheated error
MTR OV HEAT
Motor overheated error(Induction motor)
EEPROM error
EEPROM ERR
EEPROM defect error
Brake check signal error
BK SW FLT
Brake check signal error
Direction signal error
FR ERROR
Simultaneous input of UP and DOWN signals
Vane signal error
DLA ERR
Vane input signal error
ANGLE ERR
Initial angle error (Synchronous motor)
Initial angle error boundary error Encoder error
There is a deviation between reference speed and actual speed of the motor
ENCODER UVW ERR Encoder U,V,W signal defect (Synchronous motor)
Inverter grounding error
EARTH FLT
Inverter grounding error occurred
Driving direction signal error
CMD OFF ERR
During the driving, there is no direction input signal
Initial angle error
ANGLE OVER
Initial angle setting error(Synchronous motor)
CP WATDOG
There is no Control panel Watchdog signal input
Inverter output error
OUTPUT ERR
Inverter output current error
Inverter current offset error
OFFSET ERR
Inverter current offset error
Control panel watchdog signal
[Table 4.5 Error List]
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
1)
Error List
•
IGBT Fault (Inverter Gate Fault)
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 26 / 60
It is the IGBT failure, and you have to check if inverter capacity and motor setting are correct, and check GATE Board power(24V), SMPS power, and Main Board.
If IGBT error continues, IGBT is
damaged. •
OC Fault (Inverter Over-current) Current over the standard value is input to inverter side current sensor to cause over-current error. 9
Check inverter capacity and motor setting.
9
Check if main board sensing resistance (R27, R30, and R33) matches inverter capacity.
Refer to FACTORY→ CURRENT SCALE table for sensing resistance for each inverter capacity. 9
If there is a problem in the encoder, over-current may occur, so check encoder power (Synchronous motor: 5V, Induction motor: 15V) and encoder signal. if initial angle setting is incorrect, over-current may occur.
For Synchronous motor,
For Induction motor, check encoder
wiring. 9 •
Check if brake operation is normal.
OV Fault (DC Link Over-voltage) DC Link over-voltage (800V) occurred and caused the error. 9
Check 3-phsae input power. If input voltage is 560V or more, over-voltage error occurs.
9
Measure inverter P and N end part DC voltages, check if they match the voltage of BASIC→DC LINK VOLT, and adjust FACTORY→ DC LINK SCALE value to match the measured value and DC LINK VOLT value.
9
During the regeneration operation, if over-voltage error occurs, measure with tester to see if brake resistance is normal.
If brake resistance is normal, it is the defect of IGBT Gating, so replace main board or replace inverter. 9
If it is a regenerative type inverter, if power is blocked during activation of the elevator, over-voltage error may occur.
WBVF •
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 27 / 60
UV Fault (DC Link Low Voltage) DC Link voltage (400V) is low and software error occurred. 9
Check 3-phase input power. If input voltage is 280V or less, low voltage error occurs.
It may be caused by dropped voltage during the driving 9
Measure inverter P and N end part DC voltages, check if they match the voltage of BASIC→DC LINK VOLT, and adjust FACTORY→ DC LINK SCALE value to match the measured value and DC LINK VOLT value.
9
If low voltage error occurs during the activation of the elevator, check if SCR activation power (5V) of the rectifier circuit is normal, or if inverter MC relay is activated.
9 •
Check FUSE disconnection.
INV OV Load (Overload Error) Overload current is input to inverter to cause the error. The rated overload current is as follows. Load Current
Time
200% of the rated current or more
10 Sec.
150%∼200% of the rated current
20 Sec.
120%∼150% of the rated current
30 Sec.
The rated overload is set in FACTORY→OLP TIME. 9
Check inverter capacity setting and motor setting.
9
During the activation, the motor current should be smaller than the rated current. If it is bigger than the rated current, check elevator balance.
9
For Synchronous motor, if the initial angle setting is incorrect, over-current may cause overload error. For Induction motor, check if the encoder wiring is normal.
9 •
Check if brake operation is normal.
Over Speed (Over-speed Error) If the motor operates at the set value or higher, an error occurs.
Over-speed setting value is set to
120% of the rated speed, and it can be changed in FACTORY OS LEVEL. 9
Check FACTORY→OS LEVEL value.
WBVF •
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 28 / 60
Version ERR (Initialization Error) It is caused by not initializing the inverter when the inverter main board is updated or if it is replaced with a new main board.
Initialize in FACTORY INIT EEPROM. Memorize the inverter data before
the initialization. 9
Check if FACTORY →CURRENT Ver matches FACTORY →EEPROM Ver value, and if they do not match, initialize the inverter.
•
SPD Disagr (Speed not-matching Error) It is an error caused by the deviation between the reference speed and the actual speed of the motor, and it can be changed in INTERFACE SPD AGREE WID. 9
Check the inverter capacity and motor setting.
9
Check the inverter and motor connection.
9
During the activation, the motor current must be smaller than the rated current. If it is bigger than the rated current, check the elevator balance.
•
9
For Synchronous motor, it is caused when the initial angle setting is incorrect.
9
It is caused when there is a problem in the encoder signal.
9
Check the brake operation.
MTR OV Heat (Motor Overheated Error) It is caused when the motor temperature is 110°C or above.
•
9
Check the motor temperature.
9
Check if the Motor Thermal is correctly connected.
EEPROM ERR (Memory Storage Parts Defect) There is a defect in the inverter data storage parts. 9
•
It is the memory defect in the main board, and you need to replace the main board.
BK SW FLT (Brake Check Signal Problem) The brake is not working, or there is a problem in the brake check signal. 9
•
Check the brake check signal.
FR Error (UP and DOWN Direction Signal Problem) UP and DOWN signals are inputted at the same time, causing the error.
•
DLA ERR (Vane Signal Problem) There is a problem in the Vane signal. 9
Check the Vane sensor and cable connection.
WBVF •
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 29 / 60
ANGLE ERR (Initial Angle Error) The motor initial angle error is not big, so it may be activated, but as the speed gets higher, the possibility of error increases. 9
Check the encoder power and signal.
9
Set the initial angle so that BASIC→ROTOR POSITION value to be ±1V or less during the manual operation.
•
Encoder UVW ERR (Encoder U, V, and W Signal Error) It is an error caused by no encoder U, V, and W signal input. 9
•
Check the encoder power and U, V, and W signal.
Earth FLT (Inverter Grounding Error) Grounding error occurred in the inverter. 9
Check the inverter output and motor connection, and check if inverter output contactor (MC2) is properly working.
9
It also occurs if the inverter gate board is defective, or if the main board current offset is defective.
•
CMD Off ERR (Fwd/Rev Problem During Driving) During the driving, a problem occurred in Forward or Reverse signal. 9
•
Check the upper level controller error.
Angle Over (Initial Angle Boundary Error) Because the motor initial angle error is big, the motor cannot be activated. 9
Check the encoder power and signal.
9
Set the initial angle so that BASIC→ROTOR POSITION value becomes ±1V or less during the manual operation.
•
CP WATDOG (Control Part Watch-dog Error) There is a Watch-dog problem in the upper level controller. 9
If the upper level controller is not properly working, disconnect the main power, and then apply the power again.
•
Output ERR (Output Error) There is an operation signal input, but there is a problem in the inverter output. 9
Check the inverter output and the motor connection, and check if the inverter output contactor (MC2) is working properly.
9
It also occurs if the inverter gate board is defective, or if the main board current offset is defective.
WBVF •
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 30 / 60
Offset ERR (Output Error) Due to the abnormal operation of the inverter current sensor or main board, current offset occurred. 9
There is a defect in main board or current sensing board.
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 31 / 60
4.2.4 Floor Data 1)
Floor Data Composition
Classification
Floor Data
Basic Name
Unit
Detail Description
CURRENT POS
mm
Current location
1F POS
mm
Location of the 1st floor
64F POS
mm
Location of the 64th floor
PLDL POS
mm
DOWN direction lower part switch
PLDH(PLDM) POS
mm
DOWN direction middle part switch
PLDH POS
mm
DOWN direction upper part switch
PLDH2 POS
mm
PLUL POS
mm
UP direction lower part switch
PLUH(PLUM) POS
mm
UP direction middle part switch
PLUH POS
mm
UP direction upper part switch
PLUH2 POS
mm [Table 4.6 Floor Data]
2)
Floor Data Categories
•
Current POS
•
1F POS ∼ 64F POS
•
PLDL∼PLDH
•
PLUL∼PLUH
It shows the current location of the elevator in mm. It shows the location of each floor of the elevator in mm.
It shows the DOWN direction forced deceleration switch location in mm.
It shows UP direction forced deceleration switch location in mm. After normal overall height measurement, forced deceleration switch locations are saved. Compare the saved locations and the following forced deceleration locations according to the speed. If there is a deviation (±200mm) between the saved location and the forced deceleration switch location, automatic operation is impossible.
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 32 / 60
(Unit: mm) speed signal PLDL
30M/M
45M/M
60M/M
90M/M
105M/M
120M/M
150M/M
180M/M
650
1050
1450
1450
1450
1450
1450
1450
5050
7550
PLDM PLDH PLUL
650
1050
1450
3050
4000
5050
7500
10500
1450
1450
1450
1450
1450
5050
7550
7500
10500
PLUM PLUH
3050
4000
5050
[Table 4.7 Forced Deceleration Location according to the Speed]
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
2.0 2014-05-30 33 / 60
4.3 Program Menu 4.3.1 Control 1)
Control Menu Composition
•
Synchronous Motor Classification
Control List
Function Name
Initial Value
Unit
01 EL SPEED
120
MPM
02 MAX RPM
191.0
RPM
03 INSPECT RPM
23.9
RPM
04 CREEP RPM
3.2
RPM
05 RELEVEL RPM
3.2
RPM
06 SPEC DRV MPM
30
MPM
07 WSC READY
28
08 WSC START
36
09 WSC
9
10 FEED FWD GAIN
0.4
11 ACCELERATION
500
mm/SEC2
12 S-CURVE TIME
1.0
SEC
13 TQBIAS SELEC
NO USE
14 TQBIAS READYTIME
0.25
SEC
15 TQBIAS DELTA
1.2
A
16 TQBIAS P GAIN
0.5
17 TQBIAS BAND
0.3
18 LS DATA 0%
0.0
19 LS DATA 50%
0.0
20 TQ BIAS GAIN
0.0
21 LOAD S/W GAIN
0.00
22 TQBIAS OFFSET
0.0
A
23 MIN LENGTH
50
mm
24 MIN LENGTH SHORT
50
mm
25 MIN LENGTH 2PTN
50
mm
26 2PTN UNI.V LENGTH
0
mm
RPM
%
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
2.0 2014-05-30 34 / 60
27 2PTTERN SELECT
OFF
28 MAX FLOOR
12
FL
29 CHIME POINT
500
mm
30 RUN OPEN LEN
50
mm
31 DEC FLOOR OFFSET
200
32 FWD DIRECTION
UP
33 INIT START
OFF
[Table 4.8 Synchronous Motor Control Menu]
•
Induction Motor Classification
Control List
Function Name
Initial Value
Unit
18 TQ BIAS LV 30%
30
%
19 TQ BIAS LV 70%
70
%
[Table 4.9 Induction Motor Control Menu]
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
2)
Control Categories
•
EL Speed
•
Max RPM
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 35 / 60
Input the rated speed [MPM] of the elevator.
Input the current maximum number of rotations of the motor.
The MAX RPM value according to
the elevator speed is as follows. (Input up to the first decimal point.)
Changed MAX RPM =
(Formula)
Ex) If you change the elevator speed with the current speed of 120MM
and MAX RPM of 191rpm to 90MM, set MAX RPM =
rpm.
•
Inspect RPM
It is the number of motor rotations (RPM) during the manual operation.
•
CPEEP RPM
It is the number of motor rotations (RPM) during CREEP operation.
•
RELEVEL RPM
•
SPEC DRV MPM
It is the number of motor rotations (RPM) during RELEVEL operation. It shows the speed of special mode. It is not currently used.
•
WSC Ready It outputs the brake open signal during the activation of the elevator, and it shows the bandwidth of the speed controller when the brake is actually open.
•
WSC START It shows the speed controller bandwidth from when the brake is open until the “S” shape acceleration speed pattern.
•
WSC
It shows the normal elevator speed controller bandwidth after “S” shape acceleration speed
pattern. •
FEED FWD Gain It shows the frontward compensation gain value to improve the excessive characteristics during the motor acceleration and deceleration.
•
Acceleration
It shows the acceleration during the speed pattern generation.
WBVF •
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 36 / 60
S-CURVE Time It shows uniform acceleration time during the 2nd speed pattern generation.
The following figure
shows A and B time of “the 2nd speed pattern”.
[Figure 4.1 2nd Speed Pattern]
•
TQBIAS SELEC It decides whether to use load compensation.
•
9
NO USE TQBIAS: Any load compensation.
9
AUTO TQBIAS: Automatic load compensation.
9
LS TQBIAS: It is used when load compensation device (LS Board) is installed.
9
LV12 TQBIAS: Load compensation by 30% and 70% Load Switch. (Induction motor)
9
+ OPTION + : Automatic load compensation with speed observer. (Synchronous motor)
TQBIAS Ready Time It is used only when load compensation is set to automatic. It shows the time of torque current increase to open the brake and to compensate the load.
•
TQBIAS Delta It is used only when load compensation is set to automatic. It shows the sized of torque current increase to open the brake and to compensate the load.
•
TQBIAS P Gain It is used only when load compensation is set to automatic. It is the P Gain value of the controller to reduce the error when there is an error in the load compensation.
WBVF •
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 37 / 60
TQ BIAS Band It is used only when load compensation is set to automatic. During the opening of the brake, at the moment when the stopping friction becomes smaller, the elevator moves to the load direction, and it is the elevator speed when the brake is open and there is no friction force.
When you use Load Switch for load compensation (LV12 TQBIAS), if 30% switch is inputted, it generates the load compensation torque of the set ratio.
When you use Load Switch for load compensation (LV12 TQBIAS), if 70% switch is inputted, it generates the load compensation torque of the set ratio.
•
LS Data 0% When you use LS Board for load compensation, it reads the BASIC LOAD PULSE value at no load state and inputs this value.
•
LS Data 50% When you use LS Board for load compensation, it reads the BASIC LOAD PULSE value at Balance state and inputs this value.
•
TQ BIAS Gain When you use LS Board for load compensation, after the input of LOAD PULSE 0% value and LOAD PULSE 50%, it sets the TQ BIAS GAIN value to decide load compensation value. If you do not want the load compensation, you can input 0 for this value. About 50%~100% value is set. (Set initially as 75%.)
•
Load S/W Gain If you set the automatic load compensation (AUTO TQBIAS) and 30% and 70% load switches are properly installed, you can improve the ride comfort by adjusting LOAD S/W GAIN value. If 30% and 70% load switches are not properly installed, input this value as 0. About 0.2~0.3 value is set. (Initially set as 0.25.)
It is used when automatic load
compensation is set, and if there is no problem with the ride comfort during the start-up, do not set this. •
TQ BIAS Offset If you completed the load compensation, according to UP or DOWN, there may be a small difference of load compensation. OFFSET.
At this time, you can remove the difference by adjusting TQ BIAS
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 38 / 60
Important! Read this page to know Load compensation setting method.
1)
AUTO TQBIAS or +OPTION+ (Automatic load compensation) ① Make sure to check if the load current is within the rated current. ② Set AUTO TQBIAS or + OPTION +. ③ If the ride comfort is not good during the start-up, adjust TQBIAS DELTA value in the unit of 0.2.
2)
LS TQBIAS (Load compensation using LS Board) ① Set the location of the Car at middle floor. ② At no load state, read BASIC LOAD PULSE value and input to CONTROL LS DATA 0%. ③ With 50% load to Car adjust Balance state with Counter Weight. ④ Place the Car at middle floor, while manually operating UP and DOWN, and check if BASIC CURRENT is the same. At this time if UP and DOWN currents are different, adjust the load to have the same current. ⑤ Place the Car at middle floor, at 50% load state, read BASIC LOAD PULSE value and input this to CONTROL LS DATA 50%. ⑥ Remove the load from the Car and adjust CONTROL TQ BIAS GAIN for load compensation. At this time, drive to DOWN direction to adjust TQ BIAS GAIN. It is adjusted between about 50%~100%. (TQ BIAS GAIN is in the units of %.) ⑦ After you completed the load compensation, UP and DOWN operations may have a small difference. At this time, you can remove the difference by adjusting CONTROL TQ BIAS OFFSET. Make sure to input LOAD PULSE 50% value while precise Car Balance is maintained. Otherwise, precise load compensation cannot be performed.
3)
LV12 TQBIAS (Load compensation using Load Switch: only used for Induction motor) ① At 30% load, check if 30% Load switch signal is inputted. ② At 70% load, check if 70% Load switch signal is inputted. ③ LV12 TQBIAS generates 3 types of load compensation torque according to the load switch. 9
When there is no load switch input: It generates TQ BIAS LV 30% torque.
If the value of TQ
BIAS LV 30% is set to 50%, load compensation of 50% of the rated current is performed. 9
If 30% load switch is inputted: No load compensation.
9
If 70% load switch is inputted: It generates TQ BIAS LV 70% torque.
If the value of TQ BIAS
LV 70% is set to 50%, load compensation of 50% of the rated current is performed.
WBVF •
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 39 / 60
Min Length It adjusts the deceleration distance start point at the Long Run speed pattern. If this value is big, deceleration point becomes earlier and Creep distance is increased. It can be used for a pattern (Long Run) where fixed speed operation is possible.
•
Min Length Short It adjusts the deceleration distance start point at the Short Run speed pattern. If this value is big, deceleration point becomes earlier and Creep distance is increased. It can be used for a pattern (Short Run) where fixed speed operation is possible.
•
Min Length 2PTN It adjusts the deceleration distance start point at the 2-degree Pattern speed pattern. If this value is big, deceleration point becomes earlier and Creep distance is increased.
•
2PTN UNI.V Length It shows the uniform velocity distance of 2-degree speed pattern.
•
2PTN Select It decides whether to use 2-degree speed pattern or not.
•
Max Floor Input the maximum floor number. Make sure to input this before measuring the overall height.
•
Chime Point To use it as voice signal, input this to the upper level controller when the remaining distance to the service floor becomes the set value.
•
Run Open LEN It is the value to set the point when the door opens for the Car in automatic operation before it arrives at the service floor.
•
DEC Floor Offset It shows the Offset value during the calculation of the floors possible for deceleration.
•
FWD Direction According to the installation position of the motor, it is used when UP/DOWN is changed.
•
INIT Start When it becomes the condition to measure overall height, it starts the overall height measurement. After moving the Car to the overall height measurement condition in manual operation state, set it to “ON”, and when “UP” switch is activated, it starts the overall height measurement. When the overall height measurement is completed, it is automatically changed to “OFF”.
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
2.0 2014-05-30 40 / 60
4.3.2 Interface 1)
Interface Menu Composition Classification
Interface List
Function Name
Initial Value
Unit
01 ZERO SPD LVL
0.25
%
02 SPD AGREE WID
30
%
03 TQ ANS LEVEL
50
%
04 AO1 SELECT
RPM SPD FBK
05 AO2 SELECT
RPM SPD REF
06 AO3 SELECT
IQSE FBK
07 AO4 SELECT
IQSE REF
08 AO 1 CENTER
0
09 AO 1 RANGE
200
10 AO 2 CENTER
0
11 AO 2 RANGE
200
12 AO 3 CENTER
0
13 AO 3 RANGE
50
14 AO 4 CENTER
0
15 AO 4 RANGE
50
[Table 4.10 Interface Menu]
2)
Interface Categories
•
Zero SPD LVL It shows ZERO SPEED LEVEL. If it is at the set LEVEL or below, it is recognized as ZERO SPEED LEVEL.
•
SPD Agree WID It shows SPEED AGREE WIDTH. If the deviation between the reference speed and the actual speed is at the set LEVEL or below, it is recognized as SPEED AGREE.
•
TQ ANS Lever It shows TORQUE ANSWER LEVEL. If TORQUE BIAS is at the set TORQUE ANSWER LEVEL or higher, it outputs RUN signal.
WBVF •
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 41 / 60
AO1 SELECT This data is to select the first analog output parameter for observing the status of the inverter control with D/A interface board and oscilloscope.
•
AO2 SELECT This data is to select the second analog output parameter for observing the status of the inverter control with D/A interface board and oscilloscope.
•
AO3 SELECT This data is to select the third analog output parameter for observing the status of the inverter control with D/A interface board and oscilloscope.
•
AO4 SELECT This data is to select the fourth analog output parameter for observing the status of the inverter control with D/A interface board and oscilloscope.
•
AO1 CENTER This data is to set the center value of the first analog output parameter in oscilloscope.
•
AO1 RANGE This data is to set the maximum value of the first analog output parameter in oscilloscope.
•
AO2 CENTER This data is to set the center value of the second analog output parameter in oscilloscope.
•
AO2 RANGE This data is to set the maximum value of the first analog output parameter in oscilloscope.
•
AO3 CENTER This data is to set the center value of the third analog output parameter in oscilloscope.
•
AO3 RANGE This data is to set the maximum value of the third analog output parameter in oscilloscope.
•
AO4 CENTER This data is to set the center value of the fourth analog output parameter in oscilloscope.
•
AO4 RANGE This data is to set the maximum value of the fourth analog output parameter in oscilloscope.
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 42 / 60
4.3.3 Motor 1)
Motor Menu Composition
•
Synchronous motor Classification
Function Name
Initial Value
Unit
03 MOTOR CAPACIT
14.1
kW
04 RATING V
322
Vrms
05 RATING A
31
V
06 MOTOR POLES
32
POLES
07 PG PULSE
131072
PPR
08 WRPM_BASE
191
RPM
09 Jm
55
10 Know Angle
0
11 U Angle
0
12 ANGLE METHOD
DC ALIGN
13 SEARCH TIME
4000
mSec
14 MOTOR Ls
7.60
mH
15 MOTOR Rs
0.18
Ω
16 EMF Constant
0.83
01 INVERTER SEL 02 MOTOR SELECT
Motor List
17 MOTOR TYPE 18 Inj.VOLTAGE
120
V
19 Inj.FREQ
500
Hz
[Table 4.11 Motor Menu]
WBVF •
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 43 / 60
Induction motor Classification
Function Name
Initial Value
Unit
01 INVERTER SEL 02 MOTOR SELECT 03 THERM SELECT
ON
04 AUTO TUNE
ON
05 MOTOR CAPACIT
11.0
kW
04 RATING V
360
Vrms
05 RATING A
25.6
V
06 MOTOR POLES
4
POLES
Motor
07 PG PULSE
1024
PPR
List
08 WRPM_BASE
1500
RPM
09 FLUX DRE RATE
0.70
Wb
10 IQSE RATE
32.8
11 Jm
2.0
Kg-m
12 MOTOR Lm
55.70
mH
13 MOTOR Ls
57.15
mH
14 MOTOR Lr
57.96
mH
15 MOTOR Rs
0.28
Ω
16 MOTOR Rr
0.22
Ω
[Table 4.12 Motor Menu]
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
2)
Synchronous Motor Categories
•
Inverter SEL
It selects INVERTER capacity and type.
•
Motor Select
It selects MOTOR.
•
Motor Capacity
•
Rating V
It shows the rated voltage of MOTOR.
•
Ration A
It shows the rated current of MOTOR.
•
Motor Poles
•
PG Pulse
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 44 / 60
It displays MOTOR capacity.
It shows the number of poles of MOTOR.
The encoder used as the standard by us is SINCOS encoder (2048PPR) having 131072 PULSE, so as the factory default, 131072 PULSE is set, but if an encoder with different PULSE number is inevitably used, input the PULSE number of the encoder for speed feedback in PROGRAM \ MOTOR \ PG_PULSE. •
WRPM_BASE
•
Jm
•
Know Angle
It shows the maximum number of rotations of MOTOR.
It means the system inertia.
It shows how to judge initial angle. At the factory ship-out, the initial angle is already set and the data is written on the connector BOX, but it should be set again for Encoder failure and replacement. The methods to find the initial angle are divided to inserting PULSE (ANGEL METHOD: “PULSE”) and inserting DC (ANGEL METHOD: “DC ALIGN”). If there is no rope, both are possible, but DC insertion is precise, and if there is a rope, use PULSE insertion.
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 45 / 60
Important! Check points before the initial angle setting.
① Check if inverter outputs U, V, and W are connected to motor U, V, and W. ② Set CONTROL \ FWD DIRECTION to “UP”. ③ If the encoder PULSE MOTOR \ PG PULSE are “10000” and “16384”, set FACTORY \ MOTOR ENC DIR to “FWD”, and if MOTOR \ PG PULSE are “8192” and “131072”, set MOTOR ENC DIR to “REV”. If the encoder manufacturer is Tamagawa and it is an encoder of diameter 20Ø, set FACTORY\MOTOR ENC DIR to “REV”, and for diameter 30Ø encoder, set to “FWD”. ④ If SINCOS encoder is used and FACTORY \ SINCOS THETA value is ‘ON’, check if each of FACTORY \ SINMAX, FACTORY \ COS MAX values are between 3000~4000 and each of FACTORY \ SINMIN, FACTORY \ COSMIN values are between 100~500. During the initial installation, set FACTORY \ SINCOS THETA value to ‘ON’, and input the factory default value on the name plate as FACTORY \ SINMAX, SINMIN, COS MAX, COS MIN value. If SINCOS encoder is replaced, or there is no FACTORY \ SINMAX, SINMIN, COS MAX, COS MIN value on the motor name plate, set SINCOS THETA value to ‘OFF’, and it should be set again, and the refer to the following initial angle setting method for the setting method. If INCREMENTAL encoder is used, setting value is not necessary.
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 46 / 60
Important! Read this page to know Initial angle setting method. When there is no rope: You can set the initial angle with 2 methods. 1)
DC Insertion (when there is no roping)
If you initially installed an elevator using SINCOS encoder or replaced main board or SINCOS encoder, you have to set FACTORY\SINCOS THETA, SINMAX, SINMIN, COSMAX, SINMIN values. For INCREMENTAL encoder, setting value is not necessary. ① In PROGRAM \ CONTROL \ ASR JM, input the value of ‘20’. ② In PROGRAM \ CONTROL \ FEED FWD GAIN, input the value of ‘0. ③ In PROGRAM \ CONTROL \ TQ BIAS GAIN, input the value of ‘0’, and in PROGRAM \ CONTROL \ TQBIAS SELEC, input NO USE TQBIAS. ④ In PROGRAM \ MOTOR \ Know Angle, input the value of ‘0’. ⑤ In PROGRAM \ MOTOR \ ANGEL METHOD, input the value as ‘DC ALIGN’. ⑥ In PROGRAM \ MOTOR \ SEARCH TIME, input the value of ‘4000’. ⑦ When you initially installed an elevator using SINCOS encoder or replaced main board or SINCOS encoder, to start up the elevator, set FACTORY \ SINCOS THETA value as ‘OFF’. If it is not the initial installation of the elevator, SINCOS THETA is already set to ON, each of FACTORY \ SINMAX, COSMAX values are input as between 3500~4000, and each of FACTORY \ SINMIN, COSMIN values are input as between 100~500, omit the processes ⑦ and ⑧. ⑧ Reset the main board, and perform manual operation. At this time, make sure to drive forward (In HHT I/O, F direction). When the forward signal is inputted, the motor starts after 3 seconds. When the motor is operated for 5 rotations or more and stopped, each of FACTORY \ SINMAX, COSMAX values are automatically inputted as between 3500~4000, and each of FACTORY \ SINMIN, COSMIN values are automatically inputted as between 100~500. These values differ by small according to the encoder or the main board. Also, FACTORY \ SINCOS THETA values are automatically set to ‘ON’, so user do not input as ‘ON’. If FACTORY \ SINCOS THETA values are not automatically set to ‘ON’, check FACTORY \ SINMAX, COSMAX, SINMIN, COSMIN and check FACTORY \ SINCOS THETA value again. If it is less than 5 rotations, FACTORY \ SINCOS THETA values remain as ‘OFF’, so make sure to operate the motor for 5 rotations or more. If it is not the initial installation of the elevator, SINCOS THETA is already set to ‘ON’, each of
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 47 / 60
FACTORY \ SINMAX, COSMAX values are input as between 3500~4000, and each of FACTORY \ SINMIN, COSMIN values are input as between 100~500, omit this process. ⑨ If SINCOS THETA is set to ‘ON’, perform manual operation. At this time, make sure to drive forward (In HHT I/O, F direction). When the forward signal is inputted, the motor starts after about 3 seconds. During the driving, as MONITOR \ BASIC \ ROTOR POSITION values are smaller, more precise is the initial angle. Check ROTOR POSITION value when the motor rotated 1 or more times. ⑩ After the driving, while the Motor is completely stopped, input PROGRAM \ MOTOR \ Know Angle as ‘1’. After inputting Know Angle as ‘1’, check PROGRAM \ MOTOR \ U ANGLE value. This value becomes the initial angle. After the reset of the main board, input PROGRAM \ MOTOR \ Know Angle as ‘0’, and repeat ⑨～⑪ a few times to get the average value of “U ANGLE”, and substitute this value as PROGRAM \ MOTOR \ U ANGLE. ⑬ After the reset of the main board, check if it can be operated manually. If manual operation is not possible, substitute the original values to ①, ②, and ③.
WBVF 2)
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 48 / 60
Pulse Insertion (when there is a roping: planned to be added later)
If you initially installed an elevator using SINCOS encoder or replaced main board or SINCOS encoder, you have to set FACTORY \ SINCOS THETA, SINMAX, SINMIN, COSMAX, SINMIN values. For INCREMENTAL encoder, setting value is not necessary. ① In PROGRAM \ CONTROL \ TQBIAS SELEC, input the value as ‘NO USE TQBIAS’. ② Set CONTROL \ FWD DIRECTION to “UP”. ③ Set FACTORY\ MOTOR ENC DIR according to the encoder specification. ④ In PROGRAM \ MOTOR \ Know Angle, input the value of ‘0’. ⑤ Input PROGRAM \ MOTOR \ ANGEL METHOD value as ‘PULSE’. ⑥ In PROGRAM \ MOTOR \ SEARCH TIME, input the value of ‘200’. ⑦ When you initially installed an elevator using SINCOS encoder or replaced main board or SINCOS encoder, to start up the elevator, set FACTORY \ SINCOS THETA value as ‘ON’. If it is not the initial installation of the elevator, SINCOS THETA is already set to ON, omit this process. For INCREMENTAL encoder, setting value is not necessary. ⑧ Reset the main board, and perform manual operation. At this time, make sure to drive forward (In HHT I/O, F direction). When the forward signal is inputted, the motor starts after 3 seconds. When the motor is operated for 5 rotations or more and stopped, each of FACTORY \ SINMAX, COSMAX values are automatically inputted as between 3500~4000, and each of FACTORY \ SINMIN, COSMIN values are automatically inputted as between 100~500. These values differ by small according to the encoder or the main board.
Also, FACTORY \ SINCOS THETA values
are automatically set to ‘ON’, so user do not input as ‘ON’. If FACTORY \ SINCOS THETA values are not automatically set to ‘ON’, check FACTORY \ SINMAX, COSMAX, SINMIN, COSMIN and check FACTORY \ SINCOS THETA value again. If it is less than 5 rotations, FACTORY \ SINCOS THETA values remain as ‘OFF’, so make sure to operate the motor for 5 rotations or more. If it is not the initial installation of the elevator, SINCOS THETA is already set to ‘ON’, each of FACTORY \ SINMAX, COSMAX values are input as between 3500~4000, and each of FACTORY \ SINMIN, COSMIN values are input as between 100~500, omit this process. ⑨ Perform manual operation again. At this time, make sure to drive forward (In HHT I/O, F direction). When the forward signal is inputted, the motor starts after about 3 seconds. During the driving, as MONITOR \ BASIC \ ROTOR POSITION values are smaller, more precise is the initial angle. Check ROTOR POSITION value when the motor rotated 1 or more times.
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 49 / 60
⑩ After the driving, while the Motor is completely stopped, input PROGRAM \ MOTOR \ Know Angle as ‘1’. After inputting Know Angle as ‘1’, check PROGRAM \ MOTOR \ U ANGLE value. This value becomes the initial angle. If SIINCOS THETA value is set to ‘ON’, reset the main board, input Know Angle as ‘0’, and repeat ⑨～⑪ a few times to get the average value of “U ANGLE”, and substitute this value as PROGRAM \ MOTOR \ U ANGLE. ⑬ After the reset of the main board, during the manual operation, if MONITOR \ BASIC \ ROTOR POSITION values are within ±1, the initial angle is precise. Substitute the original values to ①, ②, ③, and ④. Check ROTOR POSITION value when the motor is rotated for 1 or more times.
When encoder is replaced while it is roped, if the initial angle is set with DC insertion method, set FACTORY \ SINCOS THETA to “ON”, input each of the existing FACTORY \ SINMAX, SINMIN, COSMAX, COSMIN data as 3750, 250, 3750, and 250, and set MOTOR \ KNOW ANGLE to “1”. After the input of MOTOR \ U ANGLE value as a random value, reset the main board. Change U ANGLE value until the motor works properly. If the motor works properly, never reset the main board, set FACTORY \ SINCOS THETA to “OFF”, and rotating the motor for 5 or more times will automatically input FACTORY \ SINMAX, COSMAX, SINMIN, COSMIN. If FACTORY \ SINMAX, COSMAX, SINMIN, COSMIN values are normal, reset the main board, adjust the initial angle again to set MONITOR \ BASIC \ ROTOR POSITION value to be within ±1. Check ROTOR POSITION value when the motor is rotated for 1 or more times.
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
•
U Angle
•
Angle Method
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 50 / 60
It shows the initial angle.
It shows how to find the initial angle. If it is “PULSE”, it is PULSE insertion method, and if it is “DC ALIGN”, it means DC insertion method. •
Search Time It shows the time for searching the initial angle. For PULSE insertion method, change it to be 100(mSec) or more, and for DC insertion method, change it to be 3000(mSec) or more.
•
Motor Ls
It shows MOTOR’s inductance.
•
Motor Rs
It shows MOTOR’s resistance value.
•
EMF Constant
It shows the counter-electromotive force constant of the MOTOR.
•
MOTOR TYPE
It shows the synchronous motor vane type.
•
Inj.VOLTAGE It shows the voltage size of the input pulse while the initial angle is searched with PULSE insertion method.
•
Inj.FREQ It shows the voltage frequency of the input pulse while the initial angle is searched with PULSE insertion method.
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
3)
Induction motor Motor Categories
•
Inverter SEL
It selects INVERTER capacity and type.
•
Motor Select
It selects MOTOR.
•
THERM Select
•
Auto Tune
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
It selects whether there is a MOTOR temperature sensor input.
It decides whether there is MOTOR parameter Auto tuning. (Planned to be added later) •
Motor Capacit
•
Rating V
It shows the rated voltage of the MOTOR.
•
Rating A
It shows the rated current of the MOTOR.
•
Motor Poles
•
PG Pulse
•
WRPM_BASE
•
LUX DRE RATE
•
IQSE Rate
•
Jm
•
Motor Lm
•
Motor Ls
It shows the inductance of the stator of the MOTOR.
•
Motor Lr
It shows the inductance of the rotor of the MOTOR.
•
Motor Rs
It shows the resistance value of the stator of the MOTOR.
•
Motor Rr
It shows the resistance value of the rotor of the MOTOR.
It displays MOTOR capacity.
It shows the number of poles of the MOTOR. Input the number of PULSE of the encoder for Speed FEEDBACK. It shows the number of maximum rotations of the MOTOR. It shows the magnetic flux of the stator of the MOTOR.
It shows the torque current of the MOTOR.
It shows the system inertia. It shows the mutual inductance of the MOTOR.
2.0 2014-05-30 51 / 60
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 52 / 60
4.3.4 Factory 1)
Factory Menu Composition
Classification
Factory List
Function Name
Initial Value
Unit
01 TORQUE LIMIT
150
％
02 DC LINK SCALE
0.405
03 CURRENT SCALE
53.72
m
04 INPUT VOLTAGE
380
V
05 ELD INPUT VOLT
380
V
06 WCC
1000
07 INV OC LEVEL
80
A
08 OS LEVEL
210
RPM
09 OLP TIME
10
Sec
10 SUDS ACC
600
11 CARRIER FREQ
7
12 MOTOR ENC DIR
UP
Synchronous motor
13 ENCODER TYPE
SINCOS
Synchronous motor
14 SINCOS THETA
OFF
Synchronous motor
15 SIN MAX
0
Synchronous motor
16 SIN MIN
1000
Synchronous motor
17 COS MAX
0
Synchronous motor
18 COS MIN
1000
Synchronous motor
19 BD VERSION 1.0?
ON
20 CP TEST?
OFF
21 ERASE ERROR
OFF
22 CURRENT Ver
1.51
23 EEPROM Ver
1.51
24 INIT EEPROM
OFF
[Table 4.13 Factory Menu]
Remark
KHz
WBVF
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
2)
Factory Categories
•
Torque Limit
•
DC Link Scale
2.0 2014-05-30 53 / 60
It decides the maximum output current of the INVERTER.
It shows the SCALE during the setting of DC LINK voltage. If there is a difference between the actual DC LINK voltage and the displayed DC LINK voltage, change this value. (Refer to MONITOR\BASIC\DC LINK VOLT Category) •
Current Scale It shows the SCALE during the setting of CONVERTER output current. This is decided by TURN RATIO of the current SENSOR. Current
Inverter Capacity
Current Scale
Sensing Resistance
3.9kW
13.43 (Synchronous motor)
60 Ohm
25A
5.5~7.5kW
26.86
30 Ohm
50A
11kW
40.29
20 Ohm
50A
15kW
53.72
30 Ohm
100A
22kW
80.59
20 Ohm
300A
30kW
107.45
15 Ohm
300A
•
Input Volt
•
ELD Input Volt
•
Wcc
•
INV OC Level
Input the input voltage. (Select one among 380V, 440V, or 480V) Input the output voltage of ELD device.
It shows the current controller BANDWIDTH. It shows the over-current LEVEL of the INVERTER.
Inverter Capacity
INV OC Level[A]
3.9kW(Synchronous motor)
22
5.5~7.5kW
45
11kW
65
15kW
85
22kW
150
30kW
200
Sensor
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
•
OS Level
•
OLP Time
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 54 / 60
It shows the over-speed LEVEL of the MOTOR. It shows the overload time of the motor. Load Current
Time
200% or more of the rated current
10 sec.
150%∼200% of the rated current
20 sec.
120%∼150% of the rated current
30 sec.
•
SUDS ACC
•
Carrier FREQ
It shows acceleration of the forced deceleration switch.
It shows the inverter switching frequency. To change the switching frequency, make sure to reset the main board. •
Motor ENC DIR (Synchronous Motor) If encoder PULSE MOTOR -> PG PULSE are “10000” and “16384”, set FACTORY-> MOTOR ENC DIR to “UP”, and if MOTOR -> PG PULSE are “8192” and “131072”, set MOTOR ENC DIR to “DOWN”. If the encoder manufacturer is Tamagawa and it is an encoder of diameter 20Ø, set FACTORY\MOTOR ENC DIR to “REV”, and for diameter 30Ø encoder, set to “FWD”.
•
Encoder Type (Synchronous motor) This data is to set the motor encoder type.
•
Motor encoder type
setting
OIH60-2048C/T-S5-5V(Tamagawa)
SINCOS ENC
Other encoder
INC ENC
SINCOS Theta (Synchronous motor) if 'Encoder Type' is 'SINCOS ENC', the data of 'SIN MAX' and 'SIN MIN' and 'COS MAX' and 'COS MIN' was set or detected, this data can set 'ON' . otherwise 'OFF'. if 'OFF', make procedure of setting initial angle.
•
SIN Max (Synchronous motor) It shows the maximum value of SIN waveform when SINCOS encoder is used. When SINCOS encoder is used to set the initial angle, make sure to set SINMAX value by rotating the motor.
WBVF •
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 55 / 60
SIN Min (Synchronous motor) It shows the minimum value of SIN waveform when SINCOS encoder is used. When SINCOS encoder is used to set the initial angle, make sure to set SINMIN value by rotating the motor.
•
COS Max (Synchronous motor) It shows the maximum value of COS waveform when SINCOS encoder is used. When SINCOS encoder is used to set the initial angle, make sure to set COSMAX value by rotating the motor.
•
COS Min (Synchronous motor) It shows the minimum value of COS waveform when SINCOS encoder is used. When SINCOS encoder is used to set the initial angle, make sure to set COSMIN value by rotating the motor. SIN MAX, SIN MIN, COS MAX, COS MIN values must be set when an elevator using SINCOS encoder is first started up, when the main board is replaced, and when the encoder is replaced, and refer to the initial angle setting method for the setting method.
•
BD VERSION 1.0?
•
CP TEST?
•
Erase Error
It erases the ERROR saved in HHT.
•
Current Ver
It shows the current program Version.
•
EEPROM Ver
•
INIT EEPROM
if the main board version is '1.0', this data must be ON. if not, OFF.
it is the data for testing the control panel in factory. Don't make set in your jobsite.
It shows the Version of EEPROM inside MCU.
If VERSION ERROR occurs due to difference between the program Version and EEPROM Version, and if you want to initialize it to factory default value, set it to 1 for initialization. •
INIT EEPROM initializes all the data. Therefore, input data must be recorded before the initialization.
•
NEVER RESET during INIT EEPROM.
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
Appendix 1. Start-up Time Chart (Operation Mode is the Same)
① Door Close Limit Signal ON ② Forward/Reverse Signal ON ③ Inverter Run Signal ON ④ Brake Output Signal ON & Speed Pattern Start ⑤ Brake Confirm Signal ON ⑥ Zero Speed Signal ON ⑦ Zero Speed Signal OFF & Speed Pattern Stop ⑧ Brake Output Signal OFF ⑨ Brake Confirm Signal OFF ⑩ Forward/Reverse & Inerter Run Signal OFF Door Close Limit Signal OFF
2.0 2014-05-30 56 / 60
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 57 / 60
Appendix 2. Inverter Recording Categories Categories to record when inverter is replaced and when inverter is updated. Classification
Item
Remark
EL SPEED MAX RPM TQBIAS SELEC
Control
TQBIAS DELTA
Only when TQBIAS SELEC is AUTO TQBIAS
TQBIAS BAND
Only when TQBIAS SELEC is AUTO TQBIAS
LS DATA 0%
Only when TQBIAS SELEC is AUTO TQBIAS
LS DATA 0%
Only when TQBIAS SELEC is LS TQBIAS
TQBIAS GAIN
Only when TQBIAS SELEC is LS TQBIAS
LOAD S/W GAIN
Only when TQBIAS SELEC is AUTO TQBIAS
MAX FLOOR FWD DIRECTION INVERTER SEL Interface
Factory
MOTOR SELECT U Angle
Category corresponding to Synchronous motor
MOTOR ENC DIR
Category corresponding to Synchronous motor
ENCODER TYPE
Category corresponding to Synchronous motor
SIN MAX
Category corresponding to Synchronous motor
SIN MIN
Category corresponding to Synchronous motor
COS MAX
Category corresponding to Synchronous motor
COS MIN
Category corresponding to Synchronous motor
BD VERSION 1.0
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 58 / 60
Appendix 3. Current Sensing Resistances and Current Sensor Current sensing resistances (R27, R30, and R33) and current sensor for each inverter capacity. Inverter Capacity
Current Scale
Sensing Resistance
Current Sensor
3.9kW
13.43 (Synchronous motor)
60 Ohm
25A
5.5~7.5kW
26.86
30 Ohm
50A
11kW
40.29
20 Ohm
50A
15kW
53.72
30 Ohm
100A
22kW
80.59
20 Ohm
300A
30kW
107.45
15 Ohm
300A
Sensing resistances are R27, R30, and R33 of the main board
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 59 / 60
Appendix 4. Motor Parameter 1) Induction Motor Motor Category
5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW
15kW 18.5kW 22kW
30kW
CHUNIN CHUNIN TM252 5.5kW
7.5kW 5.5kW
Motor Capacit
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
5.5
7.5
5.5
Rating V
360
360
360
360
360
360
360
345
345
340
Rating A
14.5
18.5
25.6
35
43
51
64
12.9
17.2
14.21
Motor Poles
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
PG Pulse
1024
1024
1024
1024
1024
1024
1024
1024
1024
1024
WRPM Base
1500
1500
1500
1500
1500
1500
1500
1493
1493
1513
Fluxcre Rate
0.88
0.87
0.7
0.77
0.75
0.77
0.75
0.5
0.4
0.79
IQSE Rate
16.2
22.7
32.8
43.0
56.9
63.22
77.0
18.2
24.3
16.531
JM
0.4
0.5
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
0.4
0.35
0.4
Motor Lm
70.02
67.48
55.70
40.42
36.60
35.01
22.28
172.48 123.47
Motor Ls
72.52
69.34
57.15
41.71
37.40
35.76
22.83
177.06 126.51 74.292
Motor Lr
74.19 70.490 57.958 42.34
37.90
36.04
23.08
179.34 128.30 75.183
Motor Rs
0.725
0.476
0.278
0.216
0.146
0.13
0.0651
0.99
0.714
0.784
Motor Rr
0.557
0.409
0.217
0.161
.13
0.087 0.0617
0.5
0.3
0.465
69.15
WBVF
C. MOTOR DRIVE UNIT MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 60 / 60
2) Synchronous Motor Motor
Motor Rating Rating Motor
PG
WRPM IQSE
Motor Motor
EMF
Capacity
V
A
GL/M2.5TA
4.5
235
12.8
24
10000
95.5
18.1
20
GF17A
3.7
227
10.8
32
10000
95.5
15.3
20
40.3
1.055
1.39
GL2.5TA5
3.7
235.9
10
24
10000
95.5
14.1
20
42.8
2.072
1.38
GS20A
4.6
295
12.8
24
10000
95.5
18.1
20
36.2
1.818
1.38
GS25A
6.2
275
18.5
24
10000
95.5
26.2
20
25.4
1.184
1.41
GF25A
6.2
221
16.5
32
10000
95.5
23.3
20
23.3
0.494
1.41
GT25A
6.2
320
16
32
10000
95.5
22.6
20
29.9
0.859
1.55
GF35A
7.1
242
19.5
32
10000
95.5
25
30
25.3
0.271
1.31
GS35A
7.1
253
18.5
24
10000
95.5
26.2
30
27.2
1.271
1.41
GT35A
7.1
318
16
32
10000
95.5
22.6
30
27.1
0.728
1.61
GL3.5TA/GM5TA
7.5
312
17.8
24
10000
95.5
25.2
45
32.5
1.15
1.72
GL3.5TA5
7.5
250.6
17.8
24
10000
95.5
24.7
30
25.8
0.985
1.53
GF17B
6.5
193.5
21.5
32
10000
167
25
30
10.1
0.264
0.7
GL2.5TB5
6.5
250.6
21.2
24
10000
167
25
30
18.0
0.959
0.9
GL/M2.5TB
8
271
22.3
24
10000
167
31.5
30
15.53
0.667
0.83
GF25B
10.8
232
26.6
32
10000
167
37.6
40
8.72
0.187
0.87
GT25B
10.8
317
24
32
10000
167
33.9
40
10.9
0.301
0.94
GS180L
11
248.2
27.5
24
8192
209
38.9
40
8.12
0.524
1.1
GS35B
12.4
315
31
24
10000
167
43.8
40
10.4
0.475
0.86
GT35B
14.1
305
32
32
10000
191
45.24
50
6.7
0.182
0.8
GF35B
15
235
35.8
32
10000
191
50.6
50
5.88
0.12
0.77
GL3.5TB/GM5TB
15
295
35.5
24
10000
191
50.2
50
8.11
0.288
0.86
GL3.5TB5
15
238.4
35.8
24
10000
191
50.6
50
6.55
0.242
1.06
GH10B(GF100B)
22
238.4
48
32
10000
273
69.3
105
2.7
0.078
0.8
GT100A
11
275
25
32
10000
91
35.4
30
23.8
0.5293
1.713
GT100B
22.1
263.7
50
32
10000
182
70.7
200
5.7
0.1323
0.853
GT100C
21.2
251.5
45.5
32
10000
273
64.3
105
2.9
0.075
0.596
GT100D
24.5
256.4
55
32
10000
227
77.8
110
3.9
0.0865
0.687
Category
Poles Pulse Base
JM
Rate
LS
RS
46.650 2.033
Constant 1.44
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
Ver. Date Page
Elevator Door Controller Manual
This manual is the property of Hyundai Elevator Co., Ltd. and is loaned subject to return upon demand. Contents of this publication should not be reproduced in any form without written permission of Hyundai Elevator Co., Ltd..
2.0 2014-05-30 1 / 35
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
Ver. Date Page
REVISION NO.
ITEM
Specification
DATE
0
First Edition
2013.08.24
1
Edit the format
2014.02.04
2
Reorganization of the manual
2014.05.30
Manager
2.0 2014-05-30 2 / 35
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 3 / 35
Table of Contents Safety Information ............................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 1. Preparations for Door Controller Environment for Installation ...................... 错误！未定义书签。 1.1 Environment for Installation ....................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 1.2 Car Top Box Location ................................................................................ 错误！未定义书签。 1.3 System Connection and Test Run Directions ............................................ 错误！未定义书签。 2. System Overview .......................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 2.1 CTC Board ................................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 2.2 CAR Top Box Diagram .............................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 2.3 Car Top Layout .......................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 2.3.1 Car Top Box Layout ............................................................................ 错误！未定义书签。 2.3.2 Car Top Box Board Layout .................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 3. Car Top Box.................................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 3.1 How to Connect Cable for CTC Board....................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 3.1.1 CTC Board Cable Connection and Connector Description ................. 错误！未定义书签。 3.1.2 CTX Board Cable Connection and Connector Description.................. 错误！未定义书签。 4. HHT .............................................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 4.1 HHT Usage ................................................................................................ 错误！未定义书签。 4.1.1 HHT Display and Key Configuration .................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.1.2 HHT Menu Structure............................................................................ 错误！未定义书签。 4.1.3 How to Move to Menu You Want ......................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.1.4 How to Change a Program Menu ........................................................ 错误！未定义书签。 4.2 HHT Menu ................................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 4.2.1 Monitor ................................................................................................ 错误！未定义书签。 4.2.2 Program of HHT .................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 5. Door Controller ............................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 5.1 How to Measure Door Distance ................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 5.2 How to Control Door .................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 5.3 Adjustment Point........................................................................................ 错误！未定义书签。 6. Troubleshooting for Door Controller ............................................................. 错误！未定义书签。
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 4 / 35
6.1 OC FAULT ................................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 6.2 OL FAULT.................................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 6.3 UV FAULT ................................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 6.4 OV FAULT ................................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 6.5 LIMIT ERR ................................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 6.6 CAN FAULT ............................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 6.7 VERSION ERR .......................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 6.8 ENCODER H/W ERR ................................................................................ 错误！未定义书签。 6.9 IGBT ERR .................................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 6.10 DOUBLE DIR ........................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 5 / 35
Safety Information IMPORTANT! READ SAFETY NOTE AND THIS PAGE CAREFULLY before installation •
When it comes to Installation and Commissioning, Person passing through training course and having a certification provided by Hyundai Elevator co., LTD. is qualified to make a procedure.
•
Wear safety devices
•
Check and remove unnecessary projected parts
•
Check the safety shelter plate installation at the floor side door part for the operation of the car
•
No one but the approved personnel is authorized to have access to elevator equipment and devices
•
Clean up and arrange the control board and elevator controller connecting wires. Stranded wires must be twisted before works to prevent SHORT CIRCUIT that may occur when sticking out from the terminal block.
•
Check if all controllers, field terminals and cable connectors are properly arranged and tightened or not
•
Check the location of Pin No.1 to prevent COMPONENTS DAMAGE, In case of connecting a flat cable connector. (The location of Pin No.1 is traceable by using the arrow mark of the connector or the red line of the cable).
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 6 / 35
1. Preparations for Door Controller Environment for Installation IMPORTANT! READ SAFETY NOTE AND THIS PAGE CAREFULLY before installation
1.1 Environment for Installation •
Prepare sufficient working spaces for the upper part of CAR.
•
Prepare Electric lamps for the works on the upper part of CAR.
•
The temperature of the upper part of CAR should be maintained at -10℃ ~ 40℃. Otherwise the lifespan of the corresponding components may be shortened. (Establish a temperature maintaining plan for other parts.)
•
The humidity of the upper part of CAR should be maintained at 20% ~ 90% RH.
Protect you from objects falling along the hoist way and water leakage on the upper part of CAR. Danger to life , injury or product damages
1.2 Car Top Box Location •
CAR Top Box should be attached to the designated location on the upper part of CAR.
•
The switch of CAR Top Box should be installed toward the opposite side of Door.
1.3 System Connection and Test Run Directions •
Apply CAN communication mode to the communication between CTC Board And Control System. And thorough ground connection is required for all the necessary parts. Prevent to malfunction that may be caused by external noise
•
Check the connector number correctly when you insert a connector because all connecting wires (except TB1 connection) are harnessed. Prevent to malfunction and damage to components that may be caused by contact inferiority or incorrect insertion. But, TB1 (for interphone) connection should be made in CTC Board by using a (-) driver.)
•
Be careful that no damage to components may be incurred by water leakage. Because CAR Top Box is equipped with CTC (Car Top Control) Board, CTX (Car Top extension) Board and all kinds of switches.
•
Be careful that no jamming of cables and no interference to structures may occur when running CAR. Because CAR Top Box is located on the upper part of CAR that runs along railways.
Doc. No
WBVF
Ver. Date Page
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
2.0 2014-05-30 7 / 35
2. System Overview 2.1 CTC Board CTC Board is a control system that controls the inverter dedicated to controlling the elevator door system and devices and safety circuits of all devices attached to a car. With a Cortex-M4-based CPU, this board helps to establish the optimum door open-close system by controlling motors of highperformance vector control mode as well as the location of elevator doors. In addition, connected with upper class controllers through CAN network by which system state information is interchanged, this board helps effective controlling of the elevator system. CTC Board Input Power Motor Encoder
Single-Phase AC 220 V ±15% / 60 Hz ±5% (Ground Connection to Input Power Line Prohibited) 3Φ AC220V, 140W (4P-1.2 A)
3Φ AC220V, 200 W (6P-1.2 A) 2500 PPR,
Line Drive,
3Φ AC220V, 400 W (4P-1.9 A) 5Vdc
Control Mode
Sensored Vector Control
Switching Frequency
10 kHz
Ambient Temperature
-10 ℃ ~ 40 ℃ (Storage Temp. : -20 ℃ ~ 60 ℃)
Humidity
20 ~ 90% RH (Non-Condensation)
Protective Function
Low Voltage, Over Voltage, Over Current, Over Load, Abnormal IPM, Abnormal CAN Communication [Table 2.1 CTC Board Specification]
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
2.2 CAR Top Box Diagram
[Figure 2.1 CAR Top Box Block Diagram]
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 8 / 35
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
2.3 Car Top Layout 2.3.1 Car Top Box Layout
[Figure 2.2 CAR Top Box Layout 1]
[Figure 2.3 CAR Top Box Layout 2]
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 9 / 35
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
2.3.2 Car Top Box Board Layout
[Figure 2.4 CTC Board Layout]
[Figure 2.5 CTX Board Layout]
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 10 / 35
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 11 / 35
3. Car Top Box 3.1 How to Connect Cable for CTC Board 3.1.1 CTC Board Cable Connection and Connector Description Connect the connectors that correspond to the locations of CTC Board and CTX Board in CAR Top Box.
Connector No.25 of [Figure 3.1 CTC Board] is an AC220V cable used for power supply to CTC Board, and Connector No.26 is an UVW cable connected with the motor. Therefore, be careful not to use other connectors but use the abovestated connectors when connecting cables.
[Figure 3.1 CTC Board]
Doc. No
WBVF
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
Connector
CN_T2
CC18
CN_T3
TB1
7
CC23B
8
CC23
2.0 2014-05-30 12 / 35
Pin No.
Signal
Name & Function
1
B220S
220V Power Supply (Control System)
2
LITS
LIGHT Output (22X)
3
FANS
FAN Output (22X)
4
A220S
220V Power Supply (Control System)
5
FE
GND
6
22Y
220V Power Supply (Building)
F7
CC17
Ver. Date Page
FUSE (250V, 5A) 1
22Y
220V Power Supply (Building)
2
FE
GND
3
FAN
FAN Power (22X), Output
1
22Y
220V Power Supply (to Building)
2
FE
GND
3
LIT
LIGHT Power Supply (22X), Output
1
ULA
ULA Signal, Output
2
DZ1
DZ1 Signal, Output
3
DZ2
DZ2 Signal, Output
4
DLA
DLA Signal, Output
5
N24
Control Power (0V), Input
6
N24
Control Power (0V), Input
7
P24
Control Power (+24V), Input
8
P24
Control Power (+24V), Input
1
PH1
Interphone Signal 1
2
PH2
Interphone Signal 2
3
PH3
Interphone Signal 3
4
PH4
Interphone Signal 4
1
P24
SAFTY RAY B Power(+24V), Output
2
N24
SAFTY RAY B Power (0V), Output
1
P24
SAFTY RAY A Power (+24V), Output
2
N24
SAFTY RAY A Power (0V), Output
[Table 3.1 CTC Board Connector Description-1]
Doc. No
WBVF
No.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
Connector
CC24B
CC24
CN_T21
CN_T20
CC25
CC25B
CN_T19
CN_T11
CN7
CN8
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 13 / 35
Pin No.
Signal
Name & Function
1
P24
SAFTY RAY B Control Power (+24V), Output
2
EE1
SAFTY RAY B Control Signal, Input
3
N24
SAFTY RAY B Control Power (0V), Output
1
EE1
SAFTY RAY B Control Signal, Output
2
EE2
SAFTY RAY B Control Signal, Input
3
N24
SAFTY RAY B Control Power (0V), Output
1
ONS
Manual Operation Signal, Input
2
ONU
Manual UP Operation Signal, Input
3
OND
Manual DN Operation Signal, Input
1
P24
Control Power (+24V), Output
2
ONS
Manual Operation Signal, Input
3
OAT
Automatic Operation Signal, Input
1
SE1
SAFTY EDGE B Control Signal, Input
2
FE
GND
3
SE2
SAFTY EDGE B Control Signal, Output
1
N24
Control Power (0V), Output
2
FE
GND
3
SE1
SAFTY EDGE A Control Signal, Input
1
N24
Control Power (0V), Output
2
DOB
DOOR OPEN Signal, Input
3
DCB
DOOR CLOSE Signal, Input
1
P24
Control Power (+24V), Output
2
DFMR
FMR Relay Control Output
3
DFR1
FR1 Relay Control Output
1
P24
Control Power (+24V), Output
2
N24
Control Power (0V), Output
3
OPL
OPEN LIMIT Signal, Input
1
P24
Control Power (+24V), Output
2
N24
Control Power (0V), Output
3
CLL
CLOSE LIMIT Signal, Input
[Table 3.2 CTC Board Connector Description-2]
Doc. No
WBVF
Ver. Date Page
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
No.
Connector
19
S1
PUSH BUTTON (Hardware RESET)
20
CN10
HHT
21
CN4
22
CN1
23
TAP1,2
24
F6
25
CC16
26
CN12
27
CN_T10
28
CN_T9
29
CN_T14
Pin No.
Signal
2.0 2014-05-30 14 / 35
Name & Function
1
5V
Encoder Power Supply (+5V), Output
2
GND
Encoder Power Supply (0V), Output
3
AP
A-Phase P, Input
4
AN
A-Phase N, Input
5
BP
B-Phase P, Input
6
BN
B-Phase N, Input
7
-
-
8
-
DAC
GND
GND FUSE(250V,10A)
1
A220
220V Power Supply (Control System), Input
2
B220
220V Power Supply (Control System), Input
1
U
U-Phase Inverter, Output
2
-
3
V
4
-
5
W
W--Phase Inverter, Output
1
XTSP
Input Signal to protect to be jammed finger (I/O)
2
DTSP
Output Signal to protect to be jammed finger (I/O)
1
CCH
CAN Communication, Input/Output
2
CCL
CAN Communication, Input/Output
1
P24
Control Power +24V, Output
2
CCH
CAN Communication, Input/Output
3
CCL
CAN Communication, Input/Output
4
N24
Control Power 0V, Output
V-Phase Inverter, Output
[Table 3.3 CTC Board Connector Description-3]
Doc. No
WBVF
No.
30
31
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
Connector
CN_T1
JP1
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 15 / 35
Pin No.
Signal
Name & Function
1
ULA
ULA Signal, Input
2
DZ1
DZ1 Signal, Input
3
DZ2
DZ2 Signal, Input
4
DLA
DLA Signal, Input
5
OAT
Automatic Operation Signal, Input
6
ONU
Manual UP Operation Signal, Input
7
OND
Manual DN Operation Signal, Input
8
PH1
Interphone Signal, Input
9
PH2
Interphone Signal, Input
10
PH3
Interphone Signal, Input
11
PH4
Interphone Signal, Input
12
P24
Control Power (+24V), Output
13
N24
Control Power (0V), Output
1
ON
CAN Communication Terminating Resistance Used
2
COM
COMMOM Terminal
3
OFF
CAN Communication Terminating Resistance Not Used
[Table 3.4 CTC Board Connector Description-4]
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 16 / 35
3.1.2 CTX Board Cable Connection and Connector Description Connect the connectors that correspond to the locations of CTC Board and CTX Board in CAR Top Box.
[Figure 3.2 CTX Board]
Doc. No
WBVF
No.
32
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
Connector
CN_T12
33
CC7
34
CC6
35
36
37
38
39
CN_T13
CC5
CC8
CC4B
CC4
40
CC28B
41
CC28
42
CN_T31
43
CC11
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 17 / 35
Pin No.
Signal
Name & Function
1
P24
Control Power +24V
2
DFMR
FMR Relay Driving Output
3
DFR1
FR1 Relay Driving Output
1
COMP
Compensation Rope HOOK Switch
2
ESON
Car Upper Part E-STOP Switch
1
SAFT
SAFTY Device
2
COMP
Compensation Rope HOOK Switch
1
DFL
Down Final Limit Switch
2
EXIT
Emergency Exit Switch
3
ESON
Car Upper Part E-STOP
4
GS2
Car Door Switch 2
5
SAFT
SAFTY Device
1
SAFT
SAFTY Device
2
FE
GND
3
DFL
Down Final Limit Switch
1
ESON
Car Upper Part E-STOP
2
GND
GND
3
EXIT
Emergency Exit Switch
1
GS1
Car Door Switch 1
2
FE
GND
3
GS2
Car Door Switch 2
1
ESIN
Car Inner Part E-STOP Switch
2
FE
GND
3
GS1
Car Door Switch 1
1
EL1
Emergency Light Power Input (DC 12V or AC)
2
EL2
Emergency Light Power Input (GND or AC)
1
EL1
Emergency Light Power Output (DC 12V or AC)
2
EL2
Emergency Light Power Output (GND or AC)
1
SPK1
BGM Volume Control Signal Input
2
SPK2
BGM Volume Control Signal Input
1
BGM
BGM Volume Control Signal Output
2
SPK2
BGM Volume Control Signal Output
3
FE
GND
[Table 3.5 CTX Board Connector Description]
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 18 / 35
4. HHT 4.1 HHT Usage
4.1.1 HHT Display and Key Configuration
[Figure 4.1 Keypad Configuration]
ESC
POWER ON
ESC ESC 01 MONITOR
ESC 01 BASIC
ENT
HYUNDAI ELEVATOR UP
DN
UP
DN
UP
DN
ENT
SPEED FBK
ESC
OUTPUT SIGNAL
02 I/O
INPUT SIGNAL
03 ERROR UP
DN
DN
UP
DN
UP
DN
UP
DN
UP
DN
UP
DN
UP
DN
UP
DN
ERROR 1 ENT
04 TRIP DATA UP
ERROR 2 DOOR POSITION
DN
ESC
CLL POSITION ESC
01 CONTROL
02 PROGRAM
UP
UP
ENT
01 INV, SELECT DN
ENT
02 INTERFACE UP
02 MAX SPD MPM
DAC CHANNEL 1 DN
DAC CHANNEL 2 ESC
03 MOTOR
DOOR TYPE SELECT UP
DN
ENT
04 FACTORY UP
RATING V OPN TQ LIMIT
DN
[Figure 4.2 Keypad Menu Tree Structure]
CLS TQ LIMIT
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 19 / 35
4.1.2 HHT Menu Structure As shown in [Figure 4.2 Keypad Menu Tree Structure] is configured by 3-submenu tree structure. The first submenu consists of MONITOR and PROGRAM MODE. The second submenu consists of BASIC, I/O, ERROR and TRIP DATA MODE that belong to MONITOR MODE and CONTROL, INTERFACE, MOTOR and FACTORY MODE that belong to PROGRAM MODE. The third submenu consists of all kinds of menus that belong to the first and second submenus. 4.1.3 How to Move to Menu You Want To move from a menu to a submenu, put the cursor on the lower menu you need to move to, and push ENT button. To move from the submenu to the menu, push ESC button.
←
mark appears in the 19th column of the line where the cursor is located.
4.1.4 How to Change a Program Menu Select MENU you need to change by using UP and DN buttons and push ENTER button, and you will move to DATA CHANGE MODE. Change data by using UP and DN buttons again and push ENT button, and data will be changed. If is the initial value or another value different from the standard data is set for data in the inverter,
＊
mark appears in the 18th column of the 4th line.
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 20 / 35
4.2 HHT Menu 4.2.1 Monitor MONITOR MENU consists of BASIC, I/O, ERROR and TRIP DATA submenus that are the basic information of Door Controller. 1) Basic Includes basic data such as program information, door speed, output voltage and current. Sub Function Date Menu Unit Description Menu Name Range Version Information Display
S/W VERSION
01 MONITOR
01 BASIC
SPEED FBK
-
RPM
Speed Measurement Value
SPEED REF
-
RPM
Speed Reference
CURRENT
-
A
Inverter Output Current
VOLTAGE
-
V
Inverter Output Voltage
ELECTRIC POWER
-
W
Inverter Output Power
DC LINK VOLT
-
V
DC Link Voltage
IU CURRENT
-
A
U-Phase Current
IW CURRENT
-
A
W-Phase Current
DRIVE MODE
-
CLOSE SPD MPS
-
LENGTH MEASURE
-
Calibration Display, ☛NOTE 2) LENGTH MEASURE
CAN RX DATA[1]
-
CAN Communication RX Data Display
Drive Mode Display, ☛NOTE 1) DRIVE MODE Close Drive Speed
MPS
[Table 4.1 Basic Menu Description] ☛NOTE 1) DRIVE MODE •
AUTO DRIVING : Automatic Door Drive Mode
•
INIT DRIVING : Manual Door Drive Mode
•
NUD DRIVING : NUDGE Drive Mode
•
RETURN DRIVING : Door Reopening Drive Mode
•
UNREADY!!! : Not Ready For Door Drive
☛NOTE 2) LENGTH MEASURE •
Done : Length Measurement Completed
•
Needed : Length Measurement Not Completed. Must complete length measurement before starting door open/close.
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
2) I/O Menu Displays DOOR CONTROLLER input/output signals. Sub Sub Menu Data Menu Menu 2
01 INPUT SIGNAL
01 MONITOR
02 I/O
02 OUTPUT SIGNAL
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 21 / 35
Description
O
CAN Communication 'OPEN' Signal Input
h
Open Hold Signal
o
CAR TOP BOX ‘OPEN’ Signal Input
C
CAN Communication 'CLOSE' Signal Input
h
Close Hold Signal
c
CAR TOP BOX ‘CLOSE’ Signal Input
N
Nudge Drive Input Signal
I
CAR TOP BOX ‘MANUAL’ Input
A
CAR TOP BOX ‘AUTO’ Input
O
OPEN LIMIT Switch Signal Input
C
CLOSE LIMIT Switch Signal Input
E
SAFTY EDGE Input
R
SAFTY RAY Input
Fan
Car Inner Part Fan Start Signal
Lit
Car Inner Part Light Start Signal
Fmr
Safety Line JUMPER Signal in Fireman Mode Return Drive
Fr1
Drive JUMPER Signal in 1st Fireman Mode
L
Door Load Detect Signal
F
30B (ERROR Signal)
[Table 4.2 I/O Menu Description]
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
3) Error Menu Displays the list of errors that occur to DOOR CONTROLLER. Sub Menu Error Menu IGBT FLT
Description
Inverter Output Current Instantaneous Value Exceeds FACTORY / OC LEVEL (Over Current Detect Level) Over Current Occurrence According to Time (Based on 3 Seconds at 140% of Rated Ampere) DC LINK Voltage Exceeds Over Current Level Over Current Level : 360 Vdc DC LINK Voltage Under Low Voltage Level, Low Voltage Level: 230 Vdc
OL FLT OV FLT 03 ERROR
2.0 2014-05-30 22 / 35
IPM Failure Occurrence
OC FLT
01 MONITOR
Ver. Date Page
UV FLT VERSION ERR DOUBLE DIR
EPROM and EEPROM Versions Not Equal OPEN and CLOSE Signals Simultaneous Input
LIMIT ERR
CLL and OPL Switch Signals Simultaneous Input
ENC H/W ERROR
Damaged encoder or jamming of door, restriction of door movement
CAN FLT
CAN Communication Input Signal Not Input For Certain Period of Time
[Table 4.3 Error Menu Description] 4) Trip Data Displays information on DOOR DISTANCE and CONTROLLER TRIP DISTANCE. Sub Function Date Menu Unit Description Menu Name Range DOOR mm Current Door Location POSIOTION Close Limit Switch Location, CLL POSITION mm Fixed to 300[mm] 04 OPL POSITION mm Open Limit Switch Location 01 TRIP MONITOR Opening Length, Distance OPENING DATA mm between OPL and CLL LENGTH TOTAL TRIP DIST
-
m
Total Trip Distance
TOTAL TRIP TIME
-
min
Total Trip Time
[Table 4.4 Trip Data Menu Description]
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 23 / 35
4.2.2 Program of HHT PROGRAM MENU consists of CONTROL, INTERFACE, MOTOR and FACTORY submenus. 1) Control Sub Menu
01 CONTROL
Function Name INV. SELECT MAX SPD MPM MAX SPD RPM NUDG SPD RPM CREEP SPD MPM ARV RELEASE MPM ACC OPEN
Date Range
Unit
Value
CTC Board (Inverter Type Selection) 0.0~100.0
MPM
40.0
Maximum operation Door Speed
0.0~10000.0
RPM
765.0
Maximum Motor Rotation speed of minute
0.0~10.0
MPM
5.0
Motor RPM in Nudge Drive Mode
0.0~10.0
MPM
1.5
Motor RPM in Creep Drive Mode
0.0~5.0
MPM
0.5
CREEP Section DOOR Speed in Close Drive, (Figure 4.3, ⑨ Height)
0.0~1000.0
mm/s
400.0
ACC CLOSE OP DEC OFFSET ACC REOPEN
0.0~1000.0
mm/s
400.0
500.0~500.0
mm
-15.0
0.0~1000.0
mm/s
600.0
HATCH CL TIME
0.0~2000.0
msec
500.0
500.0~500.0
mm
5
0~20.0
mm
6
ACCEL POINT
0~100.0
mm
25.0
START CRP MPM
0~10.0
MPM
2.0
OPEN DELAY T
0~1000.0
msec
20
S_RTN D OFFSET PTN9 LENGTH
Description
Variable Speed in Open Drive, (Figure 4.4, ③, ④ Slope) Variable Speed in Close Drive, (Figure 4.3, ②, ④ Slope) Slowing Deceleration Length Offset in Open Drive Sloop of deceleation before Re-Open Drive
Landing Door and Card Door Separation Section in Close Drive (Figure e4.3, ⑥ Section) Deceleration distance Offset in Return Drive Moving distance After Sensor OPL and CLL Input (Figure 4.3, ⑧ Area) Acceleration Start Point in OPEN Drive (Figure 4.4, ⑧ Acceleration Point). Clutch Completely Holds Release Roller Creep Section Speed at Open Drive Start Point (Figure 4.3, ② Point Height) Delay Time after Open Signal of CP
[Table 4.5 Control Menu Description]
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
[Figure 4.3 Close Drive and Signal]
[Figure 4.4 Open Drive and Signal]
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 24 / 35
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
[Figure 4.5 Reopen Drive and Signal]
[Figure 4.6 Reopen Drive (Short Run) and Signal]
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 25 / 35
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 26 / 35
2) Interface (Menu for Developers) Sub Menu
Function Name
02 INTERFACE
Date Range
Initial Value
DAC CHANNEL 1
SPEED_REF
DAC CHANNEL 2
PTN_MODE
AO 1 CENTER
-
-
AO 1 RANGE
-
-
AO 2 CENTER
-
-
AO 2 RANGE
-
-
Description
Menu for Developers
[Table 4.6 Interface Menu Description] 3) Motor Consists of parameters related to MOTOR applied to DOOR CONTROLLER Sub Date Initial Function Name Unit Description Menu Range Value DOOR TYPE Applied Motor Selection SELECT
03 MOTOR
RATING V
80~480
Vrms
220.0
Rated Voltage of Motor
RATING A
0.1~2000.0
Arms
1.2
Rated Current of Motor
MOTOR FREQ.
1~100
Hz
60.0
Rated Frequency of Motor
MOTOR POLES
2~100
pole
4.0
Number of Poles of Motor
ENC PULSE
2~100000
PPR
2500.0
Number of Encoder Pulses Per Motor Rotation
BASE SPEED
2~100000
RPM
1700.0
Motor RPM at Rated Frequency
IQSE RATE
0.0~100.0
A
1.697
Q-Axis Current of Motor
IDSE RATE
0.0~100.0
A
1.428
D-Axis Current of Motor
FLUX RATE
0.0~100.0
0.31
Flux of Motor
MOTOR LM
0.0~1000.0
mH
282.26
Mutual Inductance of Motor
MOTOR LS
0.0~1000.0
mH
304.86
Stator Inductance of Motor
MOTOR LR
0.0~1000.0
mH
309.54
Rotor Inductance of Motor
MOTOR RS
0.0~1000.0
Ω
8.379
Stator Resistance of Motor
MOTOR RR
0.0~1000.0
Ω
16.673
Rotor Resistance of Motor
[Table 4.7 Motor Menu Description]
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
Door Type (On HHT)
Motor [W]
Center Open
Side Open
M2CA_CO (140[W])
140[W]
O
M2CA_SO (140[W])
140[W]
M2 (200[W])
200[W]
O
-
UM2_CO (400[W])
400[W]
O
-
UM2_SO (400[W])
400[W]
M1 (400[W])
400[W]
Width of door (JJ) [mm]
O
NO
-
O
400[W]
2.0 2014-05-30 27 / 35
-
-
O
M1 (JJ1200)
Ver. Date Page
For High Speed E/L For High Speed E/L
O
Less than 1200 [mm]
O
More than 1200 [mm]
[Table 4.8 Motor Selection Table for Overland] Door Type (On HHT)
Motor [W]
Center Open
M1 (400[W])
400[W]
O
SHIP (400[W])
400[W]
Side Open
Width of door (JJ) [mm]
NO
O
Less than 1200 [mm]
[Table 4.9 Motor Selection Table for Ship] If the distance between sensor(OPL & CLL) and 01 MONITOR / 04 TRIP DATA / OPENING LENGTH are different, So that the distance error is less than 30mm, 02 Program / 01 CONTROL / 01 MAX SPD MPM and 02 MAX SPD RPM are adjusted. After that, the process proceeds to from ⑦ of 5.1 How to Measure Door Distance procedure in page 29.
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 28 / 35
4) Factory Displays DOOR CONTROLLER data inputted in the factory. 04 FACTORY PASSWORD - PASSWORD 1 : 2 - PASSWORD 2 : 3 Sub Menu
04 Factory
(ent) (ent)
Function Name
Date Range
Unit
Initial Value
Description
OPN TQ LIMIT
0.0~500.0
%
150.0
Torque Limit in Close Drive
CLS TQ LIMIT DC LINK SCALE CURRENT SCALE SYSTEM JM MULTI GAIN JM WSC
0.0~500.0
%
150.0
Torque Limit in Close Drive
0.0~10.0
0.160
Dc Link Voltage Scale
0.0~200
38.55
Output Current Scale
SC FF GAIN SC ALPHA WCC
0.0~5000.0
0.0~100.0
gm
10.0
0.0~200.0
%
150
0.0~100.0
rad/s
12
Inertia Moment of System Multi Gain for Speed Estimation at Open or Reopen Drive Start Point Speed Gain Value
0.0~1000.0
15.0
SC Feed Forward Gain Value
0.0~1.0
0.98
Speed Gain Value
1000
Current Gain Value
rad/s
OC LEVEL
0.0~500.0
A
7.0
Over Current Error Detect Level
OS LEVEL
0.0~5000.0
RPM
1300
Over Speed Error Detect Level
OL TIME
0.0~1000.0
sec
3
Over Load Error Detect Time
DRIVING CL TQ
0.0~50.0
%
0
PTN2 ACC
0.0~1000.0
mm/s2
10
DOOR WEIGHT CLOSE ENERGY DRV WITH HHT
0.0~1000.0
kg
200
Wind Pressure-related Torque Control PATTERN 2 Acceleration (Figure 4.3. ⑦ Section Slope) Door Weight
0.0~30.0
Joule
6.0
Door Close Energy
OFF
Door Drive Enabling by Using HHT Door Drive by Using HHT (OPEN / CLOSE / AUTO COMMAND)
OFF/ON
DRIVING TEST FWD DIRECTION ENC DIRECTION CL CMD HOLD T MEASURE START SPD PATTERN
0.0~10000.0
LDT CHK TIME
0.0~10.0
sec
3
Load Detect Check Time
LDT ON LVL OPEN STAND TQ ERASE ERROR
0~100
%
95
Load Detect Level
0~150
%
70
Torque Current Limit at Open Stand
0.0~100.0
0
Saved Error Record Erasing
ROM VER.
0.0~100.0
2
ROM Version
EEPROM VER.
0.0~100.0
2
EEPROM Version
Open/Close Direction Setting Encoder A/B Phase Order Setting sec
10.0
Close Signal Holding Time Distance Measurement Start Signal (ON/OFF) Speed Pattern Setting
INIT EEPROM
EEPROM Initialization
[Table 4.10 Factory Menu Description]
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 29 / 35
5. Door Controller 5.1 How to Measure Door Distance ① Check if DOOR TYPE and all cables in DOOR CONTROLLER are connected correctly. ② If confirmed that there is no abnormality in cable connection, Turn on 'POWER' switch in DOOR CONTROLLER. ③ Connect HHT with Connector No.CN7 located on the right top of CTC BOARD. ④ Select the data of 02 PROGRAM / 03 MOTOR / 01 DOOR TYPE SELECT properly. [ Refer to Table 4.8 & Table 4.9 ] ⑤ Check if 01 MONITOR / 01 BASIC / SPEED FBK values are (+) when opening DOOR manually. ⑥ If the DOOR TYPE and sign of SPEED FBK are confirmed, Select the properly data of 20 FWD DIRECTION and 21 ENC DIRECTION refer to the table below.. HHT MENU Door Type Center Open or L-type Side Open R-type Side Open
DATA to Check
DATA to Select
01 MONITOR /01 BASIC / Speed FBK Sign (at Door opening)
02 PROGRAM / 04 FACTORY/ 20 FWD DIRECTION
02 PROGRAM / 04 FACTORY/ 21 ENC DIRECTION
+ (plus)
OPEN
AB ORDER
- (minus)
OPEN
BA ORDER
+ (plus)
CLOSE
BA ORDER
- (minus)
CLOSE
AB ORDER
[Table 5.1 HHT Checking and Setting Data] If the data was selected incorrectly, then the door is intended to be movable in opposite direction. ⑦ Check if DOOR has been completely closed.(How to Check : Check if LED of CLS Sensor has been turned on and if CLS Check LED (LED5) on the right top of CTC BOARD has been turned on.) ⑧ Turn on 02 PROGRAM / 04 FACTORY / 23 MEASURE START. (Distance Measurement Drive Mode: Door Open Drive at low speed and then Close Drive again) ⑨ After completing door distance measurement, check the following parameters. 9 Check if 01 MONITOR / 01 BASIC / LENGTH MEASURE data is ‘Done’. If the data is 'Needed', distance measurement has not been completed yet. Therefore, repeat the above-stated procedure. 9 Check if 01 MONITOR / 04 TRIP DATA / OPENING LENGTH data is equal to the measured distance.
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 30 / 35
5.2 How to Control Door To control Door manually, push AUTO/MANUAL switch in CAR Top Box and set it to Manual Mode. 1) Manual Control by HHT Key Pad ① After completing door distance measurement, set 02 PROGRAM / 04 FACTORY / 18 DRV WITH HHT to ON. ② After setting 02 PROGRAM / 04 FACTORY / 18 DRV WITH HHT, check if door open/close is normal by selecting OPEN Cmd and CLOSE Cmd of 19 DRIVING TEST repeatedly. ③ After inputting CLOSE Cmd and confirming door close status, input ‘No Command’. ④ Atfer Manual Control, set 02 PROGRAM / 04 FACTORY / 18 DRV WITH HHT to OFF or click the reset button(S1) on CTC Board . 2) Manual Control by Switch in CAR Top Box Door can be open/closed by using OPEN/CLOSE switch in CAR Top Box.
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 31 / 35
5.3 Adjustment Point 1) Calibration Parameter When Clutch Noise Occurs In Door Open Drive (Figure 5.1, No.2 Section) →02 PROGRAM / 01 CONTROL / ACCEL POINT Value Adjustment Slowing Down Distance Calibration Parameter in Door Open Drive → 02 PROGRAM / 01 CONTROL / OP DEC OFFSET Value Adjustment
[Figure 5.1 Open Drive] 2) Calibration Parameter When Landing Door Collision Noise in Door Close Drive (Figure 5.2, No.6 Section) →02 PROGRAM / 01 CONTROL / HATCH CL TIME Value Adjustment 02 PROGRAM / 01 CONTROL / ARV RELEASE MPM Value Adjustment Slowing Down Distance Calibration Parameter in Door Close Drive →02 PROGRAM / 01 CONTROL / CL DEC OFFSET Value Adjustment
[Figure 5.2 Close Drive]
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 32 / 35
6. Troubleshooting for Door Controller Cope with errors or faults that may occur to Door Controller according to the following procedure.
6.1 OC FAULT
6.2 OL FAULT
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
6.3 UV FAULT
6.4 OV FAULT
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 33 / 35
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
6.5 LIMIT ERR
6.6 CAN FAULT
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 34 / 35
Doc. No
WBVF
D. DOOR CONTROLLER MANUAL
6.7 VERSION ERR
Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 35 / 35
6.8 ENCODER H/W ERR
6.9 IGBT ERR In this case, it is required to confirm if error has occurred to IPM or circuits (related to GATE SIGNAL or SMPS). To solve this, technical support of maintenance experts of the headquarter is required. If circumstances do not allow such technical support, replace CTC Board.
6.10 DOUBLE DIR This is the case that there is a simultaneous input of OPEN/CLOSE drive signals through CAN Communication. To solve this, it is required to reset the system by pushing Reset button (S1) in CTC Board or reconnect CN_T9 Connector if considered that this is an error related to contact inferiority. If DOUBLE DIR error continues in spite of taking a corrective measure, check the related signals in the control system. If confirmed that nothing is abnormal, replace CTC Board.
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
!
Elevator Troubleshooting Manual
This manual is the property of Hyundai Elevator Co., Ltd. and is loaned subject to return upon demand. Contents of this publication should not be reproduced in any form without written permission of Hyundai Elevator Co., Ltd..
2.0 2014-05-30 1 / 90
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
REVISION NO.
ITEM
Specification
DATE
0
First Edition
2013.08.24
1
Edit the format
2013.11.05
2
Reorganization of the manual
2014.05.30
Manager
2.0 2014-05-30 2 / 90
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 3 / 90
Table of Contents Safety Information ............................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 1.
HHT .............................................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 1.1 Descriptions of HHT LCD (4 Line x 20 Character) Content ....................... 错误！未定义书签。 1.2 How to Use HHT Button ............................................................................ 错误！未定义书签。 1.2.1 HHT Button Function........................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 1.2.2 Menu Structure.................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。
2.
FACTORY & FIELD Menu ........................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 2.1 Menu Category .......................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 2.2 How to Select Field Test Menu.................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 2.3 Field Test Menu ......................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 2.3.1 Simple Mode ....................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 2.3.2 Detail Mode ......................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。
3.
Information View Menu ................................................................................ 错误！未定义书签。 3.1 Menu Category .......................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 3.2 I/O Signal ................................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 3.2.1 GPIO Data........................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 3.2.2 INVERTER Data ................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 3.2.3 CAR CAN DATA ................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 3.2.4 HALL CAN Data .................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 3.2.4.8 INDICATOR Data ............................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 3.2.5 CAN Analyzer...................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 3.2.6 GROUP DATA .................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 3.2.7 RMS DATA.......................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 3.3 Fault Analysis Menu .................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 3.3.1 Fault History ........................................................................................ 错误！未定义书签。
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 4 / 90
3.3.2 RESET History .................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 3.3.3 UCM ERR Reset ................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 3.4 Trip Computer............................................................................................ 错误！未定义书签。 3.4.1 ODOMETER ....................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 3.4.2 TRIPMETER ....................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 3.4.3 BRAKE COUNTER ............................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 3.4.4 DOOR COUNTER............................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 3.4.5 TRIP RESET ....................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 3.5 Software Information ................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 4.
How to Set Up Data ..................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.1 Drive Mode ................................................................................................ 错误！未定义书签。 4.1.1 Parking DRV ....................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.1.2 ATT DRV ............................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 4.1.3 Move(IND) DRV .................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 4.1.4 Lobby Return....................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.1.5 VIP Service ......................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.1.6 Auto Re-Level ..................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.1.7 Quiet Night DRV.................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 4.1.8 Fire Evacuation ................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.1.9 Fire Fighter DRV ................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 4.1.10 Seismic DRV ..................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.1.11 ELD DRV........................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.1.12 EMP (ATS) DRV ............................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.1.13 PIT Flood DRV .................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 4.2 Optional Data............................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 4.2.1 Group Mode ........................................................................................ 错误！未定义书签。 4.2.2 DSS Mode ........................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.2.3 Indicator Data ...................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.2.4 CAR LCD Display................................................................................ 错误！未定义书签。 4.2.5 CTS Board .......................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 5 / 90
4.2.6 Supervisory ......................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.2.7 Announcement .................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.2.8 Skip Operation .................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.2.9 Sub Brake Type .................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 4.2.10 Brake Off Delay ................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 4.2.11 Motor Cooling .................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.2.12 Brake SW OPTION ........................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.3 Floor Data .................................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 4.3.1 Floor Non-Stop .................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.3.2 Floor Display ....................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.3.3 Floor Basement ................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.3.4 Floor Total ........................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.3.5 FLOOR FORCE STOP ....................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.3.6 FLOOR RMS PEAK ............................................................................ 错误！未定义书签。 4.4 Door Data .................................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 4.4.1 Door Time ........................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.4.2 Landing Open...................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.4.3 Nudging Func ...................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.4.4 Hold Open ........................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.4.5 Door Type ........................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.4.6 HNPS SYSTEM .................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 4.4.7 DOOR TIME EXT ................................................................................ 错误！未定义书签。 4.4.8 DOOR LOAD DETECT ....................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.5 Call Data .................................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.5.1 Manual Call ......................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.5.2 2nd Touch Cancel ............................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.5.3 Fake Call Cancel ................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 4.5.4 Disabled Call ....................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.5.5 Hall Call Pass ...................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.5.6 Card Key Call ...................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 6 / 90
4.5.7 CALL PROCESS OPT ........................................................................ 错误！未定义书签。 4.6 Timer Data ................................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 4.6.1 Cage Light Off ..................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.6.2 Cage Fan Off....................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.6.3 Current Time ....................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 4.6.4 Change Time....................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 5.
Error Information HHT displayed.................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 5.1 Error Code Classification ........................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 5.2 Display Information Error Indicated ........................................................... 错误！未定义书签。
6.
Data Table for Analysis Error (Reference Table) ......................................... 错误！未定义书签。 6.1 GPIO Data (Hardware INPUT/OUTPUT Port Status) ................................ 错误！未定义书签。 6.2 Inverter Data .............................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 6.3 Door Inverter Data ..................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 6.4 COP Data .................................................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。
7.
How to Analysis Error of WBVF System ...................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 7.1 Error Information of HHT Menu ................................................................. 错误！未定义书签。 7.2 How to Use HHT for Analysis Error ........................................................... 错误！未定义书签。 7.2.1 Fault History ........................................................................................ 错误！未定义书签。 7.2.2 Reset History....................................................................................... 错误！未定义书签。
8.
How to Resolve Error of WBVF System (Code 1~140)................................ 错误！未定义书签。
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 7 / 90
Safety Information IMPORTANT! READ SAFETY NOTE AND THIS PAGE CAREFULLY before installation •
When it comes to Installation and Commissioning, Person passing through training course and having a certification provided by Hyundai Elevator co., LTD. is qualified to make a procedure.
•
Wear safety devices
•
Check and remove unnecessary projected parts
•
Check the safety shelter plate installation at the floor side door part for the operation of the car
•
No one but the approved personnel is authorized to have access to elevator equipment and devices
•
Clean up and arrange the control board and elevator controller connecting wires. Stranded wires must be twisted before works to prevent SHORT CIRCUIT that may occur when sticking out from the terminal block.
•
Check if all controllers, field terminals and cable connectors are properly arranged and tightened or not
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
2.0 2014-05-30 8 / 90
1. HHT 1.1 Descriptions of HHT LCD (4 Line x 20 Character) Content ①② ③ ④ 1
5 (B1) 09:45:35 Auto_Drive RUN_UP
2 3 4 Category
Description of the Displayed Contents ↑: UP direction
① Direction information 1
↓: DOWN
② Landing sensor information ③ Current floor (Floor displayed on the indicator)
※ Refer to the separately displayed contents
5: Absolute floor B1: Floor displayed on CAR and floor indicator
④ Time information
Hour : Min. : Sec. Operation mode information
None
No operation mode
On Car_Drive InCar_Drive Mroom_Drive Initial_Drive 2
ELD_Drive Auto_Landing Pois_Inspection Auto_Relevel FireMan_Drv Fire_Drive
CAR upper part manual operation CAR internal manual operation Machine room manual operation Overall height measurement operation
Parking_Drv
Parking operation
IND_Drive
Independent (moving) operation
ATT_Drive
ATT(operator) operation
VIP_Drive
VIP operation
Auto_Drive
Automatic operation
ELD operation Adjacent floor automatic stopping operation Absolute position checking operation Re-level operation Firefighter operation(1st and 2nd) Fire recovery operation
[Table 1.1 Operation Information Display-1]
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Category
2.0 2014-05-30 9 / 90
Description of the Displayed Contents Operation direction and door status information
3
4
RUN_UP
UP direction driving
RUN_DOWN
DOWN direction driving
Door_Closed
Door Full close status
Door_Opened
Door Full open status
Door_Closing
Door is closing
Door_Opening
Door is opening
Door_Semiopened
Door partial open status (No Open Limit operation allowed)
Door_Opened_EE
Status of maintaining door open by multi-beam operation
Door_Opened_SE
Status of maintaining door open by safety edge operation
Opened_OverLoad
Status of maintaining door open by Over Load switch operation
Opened_OpButton
Status of maintaining door open by DOB button operation
Door_Opened_DCS
Status of maintaining door open by DCS switch operation
Door_Closed_DCS
Status of maintaining door closed by DCS switch operation
Door_Stoped_DCS
Status of partial opening stopped by DCS switch operation
Unknown
Unknown door status
Disorder information display
※ Refer to disorder analysis manual (Empty status when there is no disorder)
[Table 1.2 Operation Information Display-2]
LCD sensor
Shielding pipe (VANE)
Correct attachment status
CAR should be lowered
CAR should be lifted
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 10 / 90
1.2 How to Use HHT Button 1.2.1 HHT Button Function
UP
ENT
•
Move between menu categories
•
Change data
•
Select menu category
•
Confirm data change
UP
+
DN
ESC
ENT
•
Move between menu categories
•
Change data
•
Move to upper level
•
Cancel data change
•
Erase input data
•
Same as Backspace
menu
When you press ENT key in system status display screen, it enters HHT menu mode.
5 (B1) 09:45:35 Auto_Drive RUN_UP
Menu category
ENT
Function
[1] INVERTER MENU
Change inverter data and check various stetting status
[2] SYSTEM MENU
Change operation control data and check various setting status
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
1.2.2 Menu Structure [2]SYSTEM MENU STRUCTURE
Summary of Major Functions •
Set mandatory inputs at factory ship-out (T/M type, construction number, etc.)
•
Set site test operations and test functions
•
Check system input and output signals
•
View disorder history
•
View system operation history
•
View program version information
•
Set/release system operation mode
•
Set/release option category
•
Set/release floor related information
•
Set/release door function related information
•
Set/release call related information
•
Set/release time related information
1. FACTORY & FIELD
2. INFORMATION VIEW
3. DATA SET-UP
2.0 2014-05-30 11 / 90
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 12 / 90
2. FACTORY & FIELD Menu
Menu category
1. FACTORY SET-UP
Contents of the Settings
1. PROJECT NO.
Input construction No. for each site (Input entire 9 digits of the construction No.)
2. PCB SERIAL NO.
Input 16 digits of ID unique to the main PCB
3. PRODUCTION DATE
Input production date (YYYYMMDD)
4. T/M TYPE 5. COUNTRY INFO 6. REGULATION CODE
2. FIELD MODE SET-UP
1.
3.
GEARLESS MR (synchronizer MR)
•
GEARLESS MRL(synchronizer MRL)
•
GEARED MR(inducer MR)
Select KOREA / CHINA / ASIA / AMERICA / EUROPE •
Select safety specification code
•
Select KS_CODE / EN_CODE / GB_CODE / ASME_CODE KS_CODE_REV
•
NONE : cannot be activated
•
MANUAL DRIVE : manual operation possible (installation mode)
•
AUTO DRIVE : automatic operation possible (After AUTO DRIVE setting, overall height measurement operation is possible.)
•
MANAGEMENT : system management mode
•
Call : only CAR call is recognized (hall call cannot be registered)
•
Door : maintain door closed status
•
Test period (time), door activation condition, test operation floor setting is possible.
•
Refer to the following contents for detail setting tips.
SIMPLE MODE
FIELD TEST 2.
•
DETAIL MODE
2.1 Menu Category
2.2 How to Select Field Test Menu 5 (B1) 09:45:35 Auto_Drive RUN_UP
Auto_Drive 5 Door_Closed [1]INVERTER MENU →[2]SYSTEM MENU
Auto_Drive 5 Door_Closed →1.FACTORY & FIELD 2.INFORMATION VIEW
Auto_Drive 5 Door_Closed 2.FIELD MODE SET-UP →3.FIELD TEST
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 13 / 90
•
As in the above figure, input ENT key in the system operation information display screen to enter the system default menu.
•
Use UP or DN to move the cursor to the desired position of the menu, and input ENT key.
2.3 Field Test Menu Menu Category [1] SIMPLE MODE [2] DETAIL MODE
Function CAR automatic operation test (activated only by machine room manual call, maintains door closed status) CAR automatic operation test (operation time, operation floor and door status are individually set.)
2.3.1 Simple Mode
Auto_Drive 5 Door_Closed 1.SIMPLE MODE (1-ON / 0-OFF) : 1← When you select SIMPLE MODE setting menu, the above figure is displayed on LCD, and the current data are displayed. ① setting:
1
ENT
② release:
0
ENT
③ cancel:
ESC
Auto_Drive 5 Door_Closed 1.SIM PLE M ODE RUN Delay(s) : 3← RUN Delay(s) : The standby time (sec. unit) from stopping at the service floor until next start when a series of CAR calls are registered. You can set from min. 3 sec. ~ 255 sec.
•
Operation mode : Automatic operation (released when it is converted to manual operation, returned to test mode when it is converted manual → automatic)
•
DOOR status : Maintain CLOSED (If SIMPLE MODE is set while door is open, it automatically CLOSES)
•
Call recognition : Only CAR call is recognized (floor call is ignored) → machine room manual CAR CALL can be registered.
•
DISPLAY : “CHECKING” is displayed on CAR and floor display device (HIP/HPI)
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 14 / 90
2.3.2 Detail Mode When you set DETAIL MODE to 1(ON), the following detail menu categories are automatically displayed. Menu category
Function
[1]TEST PERIOD
Set TEST operation time
[2]DOOR CONTROL
Set DOOR operation type during TEST operation
[3]TEST FLOOR
Set operation section(floor) during TEST operation
DETAIL MODE release : When you select DETAIL MODE RELEASE, the detail parameters such as time, door, floor information, etc. are automatically initialized.
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 15 / 90
1) TEST PERIOD : Set test operation time
[ 1 ] TEST PERIOD : 1 : ALL 2 : SPECIFIC
KEY 1
2
ESC
•
Function ALL
24 hours all day test (Unless test mode is released, it is maintained.)
SPECIFIC
When it becomes the set time, it is converted to the test mode for the corresponding time every day. Ex) 1. In case of start time(18:00), end time(20:00) → Automatic test operation is performed every day at 6 ~ 8PM for 2 hours 2. In case of start time(20:00), end time(08:00) → Automatic test operation is performed every day at 8PM ~ 8AM the next day for 12 hours 3. If the start time is the same as end time (start time-20:00, end time-20:00) → It is the same as ALL, and it is converted to all day test mode for 24 hours
Exits from TEST PERIOD menu and moves to the upper level menu
When SPECIFIC mode is selected, time input method
[ 1 ] TEST PERIOD : 2 1 : ALL 2 : SPECIFIC Cur Start Time : 18-00 New Start Time :
•
[ 1 ] TEST PERIOD : 2 1 : ALL 2 : SPECIFIC Cur End Time : 20-00 New End Time :
How to input time Start Time and End Time
Input time with hour (2 digits) and minute (2 digits), and press ENT key. Ex) For 7:00 PM: 1900 For 8:15 PM: 2015
•
Input the time data in the units of 24 hours.
•
If you don’t want to change the time: press ESC key
•
If there is an error in the time data input, “Time data error!” Message is displayed on the screen for about 3 sec.
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 16 / 90
2) DOOR CONTROL : Select DOOR operation type
[ 2 ]DOOR CONTROL : 1 : AUTO 2 : CLOSE
KEY
Function
1
AUTO
2
CLOSE
ESC
DOOR operates as the same as automatic operation DOOR CLOSED state is maintained (OPEN button operation ignored). In DOOR OPEN state, if it is set to CLOSE, it automatically closes the DOOR.
Exits from DOOR CONTROL menu, and moves to the upper level menu
3) TEST FLOOR : Set test operation section(floors)
[ 3 ]TEST FLOOR : 1 : ALL 2 : SPECIFIC
KEY
Function
1
ALL
2
SPECIFIC
ESC
All floor test Set certain test section(2 floors shuttle operation)
Exits from TEST FLOOR menu, and moves to the upper level menu
[ 3 ]TEST FLOOR :2 1 : ALL 2 : SPECIFIC 1st Floor :
[ 3 ]TEST FLOOR :2 1 : ALL 2 : SPECIFIC 1st Floor :1 2nd Floor :
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL •
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 17 / 90
How to set the floor 1ST FLOOR 2ND FLOOR
•
Input the corresponding floor data, and press ENT key.
•
After 1ST FLOOR input, when you press ENT key, it is automatically converted to the screen for 2ND FLOOR input.
If there is an error in the floor information input. “Floor data error!” message is displayed on the screen for about 3 sec.
Setting status
Operation
TEST PERIOD
DOOR CONTROL
TEST FLOOR
ALL
AUTO
ALL
ALL
CLOSE
ALL
ALL
AUTO
1st Floor : 1 2nd Floor : 50
AUTO
1st Floor : 1 2nd Floor : 50
Start Time: 20-00 End Time : 08-00
Operation Automatic floor by floor service for all floors for 24 hours (stop at 1st floor → door operation → stop at 2nd floor → door operation … →Nth floor → N-1th floor) Automatic floor by floor service for all floors for 24 hours (stop at 1st floor → 5 sec. standby → stop at 2nd floor → 5 sec. standby … →Nth floor → N-1th floor) 1st floor 50th floor shuttle operation for 24 hours (stop at 1st floor → door operation → stop at 50th floor → door operation … →1st floor → 50th floor) 1st floor 50th floor shuttle operation every day from 8:00PM ~ 8:00AM the next day (After the corresponding time has passed, it is converted to automatic operation.)
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 18 / 90
3. Information View Menu 3.1 Menu Category Menu Category
1.
2.
3.
4.
I/O SIGNAL
FAULT ANALYSIS
TRIP COMPUTER
SOFTWARE INFO
Contents
1.
GPIO DATA
Check hardware input and output signal
2.
INVERTER DATA
Check controller
3.
CAR CAN DATA
Check CAR side CAN communication data
4.
HALL CAN DATA
Check HALL side CAN communication data
5.
CAN ANALYZER
Analyze CAR and HALL side CAN communication status
6.
GROUP DATA
Check GROUP communication data
7.
RMS DATA
Check supervisory communication data
1.
FAULT HISTORY
2.
RESET HISTORY
3.
UCM ERROR RESET
1.
ODOMETER
2.
TRIPMETER
3.
BRAKE COUNTER
4.
DOOR COUNTER
5.
TRIP RESET
TRIPMETER information initialization
1.
SW VERSION
View program version information
2.
SW BUILD DATE
Program built date (year/month/day hour:min.:sec.)
3.
CPU USAGE
Analyze CPU usage ratio of the system
inverter input and output signal
View disorder occurrence/solution information (View by year/month/day and disorder statistics) View system reset and power ON/OFF information ( View by year/month/day and statistics) UCM(Unintended Car Movement: moving with door open) error reset View accumulated driving history (driving time, number, distance): Initialization is impossible View section driving history (driving time, number, distance): Initialization is possible View number of brake activations (open → close is counted as 1 time) View number of door activations (each of stop → close, stop → open is counted as 1 time)
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
2.0 2014-05-30 19 / 90
3.2 I/O Signal 3.2.1 GPIO Data Check main board input signal and output signal status
1. GPIO DATA INPUT_1 : 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
(1): High during operation, Description
(0): Low during operation
Input
Order of signal
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
INPUT_1
DS (1)
MTR (0)
MD (1)
MU (1)
MCS (1)
AUTO (1)
MC2 (0)
SA (0)
INPUT_2
PLUM (1)
PLUH (1)
PLUL (1)
ULS (0)
BKBS (1)
BKAC (0)
BKAS (1)
GS (1)
INPUT_3
DZ (1)
DL (1)
UL (1)
RBL (0)
DLS (0)
PLDL (1)
PLDH (1)
PLDM (1)
INPUT_4
CCS (0)
UCM (1)
THS (1)
ELDI (1)
EQP (1)
EQS (1)
RBKI (1)
FMR2 (1)
INPUT_5
GOV(0)
ESTOP(0)
UFL(0)
DFL(0)
PIT (0)
UDC (1)
CTOL (0)
-
INPUT_6
-
-
-
-
P24V (1)
PLDH2 (1)
PLUH2 (1)
RDZ (1)
INPUT_7
-
-
-
-
RUNA (1)
BKO (1)
ZSP (1)
INPUT_8
Description
Output
Order of signal
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
OUT_1
SAFE (1)
ELDE (1)
DX (1)
RBK (1)
BKP (1)
BKB (1)
BKA (1)
MC2 (1)
CP_BZ (1)
FR2 (1)
OUT_2 OUT_3 OUT_4 OUT_5 OUT_6 OUT_7 OUT_8
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 20 / 90
3.2.2 INVERTER Data Check control system
inverter input and output data
2. INVERTER DATA Fr_INV1 : 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
Description
INVERTER → control system
Order of signal
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Fr_INV1
ANGLDCT
INITOK
FLRDIR
PTNOUT
RUNOPN
DEC3
DEC2
DEC1
Fr_INV2
SDSERR
MXFLRDN
MXFLRUP
INITFAIL
POSIERR
NOCALL
NEARSTP
INVERR
SUDSDCL
FLTDRV
DCLFLERR
WDT
ANTISTAL
SDSWRN
Fr_INV3 MAX_FLR
Maximum floors of operation
DEC_FLR
Floor possible for deceleration
CUR_FLR
Current floor
LOAD(%)
Load ratio (%)
SPEED CURPOSI
Current driving speed Absolute position information(mm)
Description
control system → INVERTER
Order of signal
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
To_INV1
RESCU
ELD
INIT
RELEVEL
NEAR
CRTL
MANUAL
AUTO
WDT
UPDN
MANDECL
HIGH
DN
UP
READY
MODE4
MODE3
MODE2
MODE1
To_INV2 To_INV3 CALL_FLR
Destination floor information
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 21 / 90
3.2.3 CAR CAN DATA Menu Category
Contents
1.DOOR INV CAN DATA
Control panel main board
Door Inverter board
2.FCOP CTRL DATA
Control panel main board
FCOP board
3.RCOP CTRL DATA
Control panel main board
RCOP board
4.WCOP CTRL DATA
Control panel main board
WCOP board
5.WCOP2 CTRL DATA
Control panel main board
WCOP2 board
6.FCOP BUTTON DATA
Control panel main board ← FCOP call button data
7.RCOP BUTTON DATA
Control panel main board
← SCOP call button data
8.WCOP BUTTON DATA
Control panel main board
← WCOP call button data
9.WCOP2 BUTTON DATA
Control panel main board
← WCOP2 call button data
10.FCOP LAMP DATA
Control panel main board → FCOP call button lamp data
11.RCOP LAMP DATA
Control panel main board → SCOP call button lamp data
12.WCOP LAMP DATA
Control panel main board → WCOP call button lamp data
13.WCOP2 LAMP DATA
Control panel main board
14.INDICATOR DATA 15.EXT IO DATA
→ WCOP2 call button lamp data
Control panel main board → Indicator display data Control panel main board
Extension IO board data
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
1) DINV CAN Data Check control system
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 22 / 90
door inverter CAN communication data
3. DINV CAN DATA Fr_DIV1 : 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
Description
DOOR INVERTER → control system
Order of signal
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Fr_DINV1
DCL(1)
DOL(1)
SE(1)
EE(1)
AUTO(1)
ONS(1)
DCB(1)
DOB(1)
CL_ACT(1)
OP_ACT(1)
INITOK(1)
Torque(1)
ERR(1)
Fr_DINV2 Fr_DINV3
MODE
Fr_DINV4
Floor with door inverter overload
Fr_DINV5 Fr_DINV6 Fr_DINV7
Door inverter error code
Fr_DINV8
Door inverter program version
Description
DOOR INVERTER ← control system
Order of signal
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
To_DINV1
FR1(1)
FMR(1)
LIGHT(1)
FAN(1)
RESET(1)
NUG(1)
CLX(1)
OPX(1)
To_DINV2
HEAVY DOOR floor information
To_DINV3
Current floor information Car run(1)
To_DINV4 To_DINV5 To_DINV6 To_DINV7 To_DINV8
Main board software version
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 23 / 90
2) FCOP CTRL Data Check control system FCOP board CAN communication data
Description Order of signal
COP board → control system 8
7
Fr_COP1 Fr_COP2
EACH(1)
6
5
4
3
2
1
LD110(1)
LD100(1)
LD70(1)
LD30(1)
DCB(1)
DOB(1)
EVEN(1)
MOVE(1)
ATTPASS(1)
ATTDN(1)
ATTUP(1)
ATT(1)
FR2(1)
INS(1)
DCS(1)
FR1(1)
DR_EXT(1)
CDKEY(1)
ODD(1)
Fr_COP3 Fr_COP4 Fr_COP5 Fr_COP6 Fr_COP7 Fr_COP8
FCOP software version
Description
control system → COP board
Order of signal
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
To_COP1
DST
CHIME
BUZZER
DFD
DN
UP
DCBL
DOBL
To_COP2
L_VOL
VCANCEL
VRDOOR
VFDOOR
VCL
VOP
VUPDN
VFLST
To_COP3
DR_EXT_LP
V_UP
V_DN
V_ATT
VEQ
VFIRE
VOVLD
VFAULT
J_CHIME
J_BZ
To_COP4
VFLOOR 1st (ASCII Code)
To_COP5
VFLOOR 2nd(ASCII Code)
To_COP6
VFLOOR 3rd(ASCII Code)
To_COP7 To_COP8
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 24 / 90
3) RCOP CTRL Data Check control system FCOP board CAN communication data Description Order of signal
COP board → control system 8
7
6
5
4
3
Fr_RCOP Description
1
DCB(1)
DOB(1)
control system → COP board
Order of signal
8
7
6
5
4
3
To_RCOP
4)
2
2
1
DCBL
DOBL
WCOP CTRL Data
5) WCOP2 CTRL Data The display method is the same as RCOP CTRL DATA. 6)
FCOP BUTTON Data
Description
COP board → control system
Order of signal
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1..8
BT_8
BT_7
BT_6
BT_5
BT_4
BT_3
BT_2
BT_1
16 . . 9
BT_16
BT_9
24 . . 17
BT_24
BT_17
32 . . 25
BT_32
BT_25
40 . . 33
BT_40
BT_33
48 . . 41
BT_48
BT_41
56 . . 49
BT_56
BT_49
64 . . 57
BT_64
BT_57
7)
RCOP BUTTON Data,
8)
WCOP BUTTON Data
9)
WCOP2 BUTTON Data
10) FCOP LAMP Data
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 25 / 90
COP board ← control system
Description Order of signal
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1..8
LP_8
LP_7
LP_6
LP_5
LP_4
LP_3
LP_2
LP_1
16 . . 9
LP_16
LP_9
24 . . 17
LP_24
LP_17
32 . . 25
LP_32
LP_25
40 . . 33
LP_40
LP_33
48 . . 41
LP_48
LP_41
56 . . 49
LP_56
LP_49
64 . . 57
LP_64
LP_57
11) RCOP LAMP Data 12) WCOP LAMP Data 13) WCOP2 LAMP Data The display method is the same as FCOP LAMP DATA. 14) INDICATOR Data COP board ← control system
Description Order of signal To_CAR1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
DST
DN
UP
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
FIRE
DFD
To_CAR2
Floor Information(Decimal format)
To_CAR3
Floor 1st (ASCII format)
To_CAR4
Floor 2nd (ASCII format)
To_CAR5
Floor 3rd (ASCII format)
To_CAR6 To_CAR7 To_CAR8
FMR
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 26 / 90
15) EXT IO board Data EXT IO board ← control system
Description Order of signal 1..8 16 . . 9 24 . . 17 32 . . 25 40 . . 33 48 . . 41 56 . . 49 64 . . 57
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
VIP2
VIP1
EMPS
EMPR
EMPA
ATS
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 27 / 90
3.2.4 HALL CAN Data Menu Category
Function
1.
HALL RX DATA
Control panel main board ← HALL communication DATA of each floor
2.
HALL TX LAMP UP
Control panel main board → HALL UP button lamp output DATA of each floor
3.
HALL TX LAMP DN
Control panel main board → HALL DN button lamp output DATA of each floor
4.
HALL TX LNTN UP
Control panel main board → HALL UP lantern output DATA of each floor
5.
HALL TX LNTN DN
Control panel main board → HALL DN lantern output DATA of each floor
6.
HALL TX CHIME UP
Control panel main board → HALL UP chime output DATA of each floor
7.
HALL TX CHIME DN
Control panel main board → HALL DN chime output DATA of each floor
8.
INDICATOR DATA
Control panel main board → HALL side indicator
1)
HALL RX Data
Description Order of signal FLR
HPI/HIP → control system 8
7
6
5
PARKING
FMR
4
3
2
DN button
Use UP or DN key to change the corresponding floor. If there is a problem with CAN communication in the corresponding floor, it is displayed as “NO DATA”.
1 UP button
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL 2)
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 28 / 90
HALL TX LAMP UP
8th floor HALL UP
1st floor HALL UP
button lamp output
button lamp output
Use UP or DN key to change the corresponding floor information. (Information of floors 1 ~ 64 are displayed in the units of 8 floors.) 3)
HALL TX LAMP DN
4)
HALL TX LNTN UP
5)
HALL TX LNTN DN
6)
HALL TX CHIME UP
7) HALL TX CHIME DN The display method is the same as HALL TX LAMP UP.
8)
INDICATOR Data HIP board ← control system
Description Order of signal To_HALL1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
DST
DN
UP
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
FIRE
DFD
To_HALL2
Floor Information(Decimal format)
To_HALL3
Floor 1st (ASCII format)
To_HALL4
Floor 2nd (ASCII format)
To_HALL5
Floor 3rd (ASCII format)
To_HALL6
FIRE_DRV
To_HALL7 To_HALL8
Fire return foor
FMR
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 29 / 90
3.2.5 CAN Analyzer Analyzes CAR and HALL side CAN communication status
Menu Category and Displayed Contents
Contents
Tx Err Cnt
Control panel main board → CAR communication error count (0~255)
Rx Err Cnt
control panel main board ← CAR communication error count (0~255)
Err Status 1.
CAR CAN ANALYZER
• •
ACK ERR, CRC ERR, FRM ERR, STF ERR : control panel Tx data changed or data loss occurred
•
LINE OK : communication line is normal
•
LINE OPEN : communication line is open (control panel CAR side communication line connection is disconnected)
•
LINE SHORT : communication line is short-circuited (control panel CAR side communication line is short-circuited or reversed)
BUS STS
2.
HALL CAN ANALYZER
Same as CAR side
NONE : no error
Same contents as CAR side
3.2.6 GROUP DATA Menu Category and Displayed Contents GROUP mode disabled
1. GROUP COMM STATUS 2.GROUP I/O
OPT BD comm fail
Contents GROUP option inactivated Main board
OPT board communication error
GROUP comm fail
Main board
GROUP board communication error
GROUP comm ok
Main board
OPT board communication ok
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 30 / 90
3.2.7 RMS DATA Menu Category and Displayed Contents RMS mode disabled
1. COMM STATUS
Contents RMS option inactivated
DPRAM3 BD comm fail
Main board
DPRAM3 board communication error
DPRAM3 BD comm ok
Main board
DPRAM3 board communication ok
2.REAL CTRL DATA
Real time control data received from supervisory system.
3.STORED DATA
Control data stored in system memory
4.REAL DATA RX
Real time communication data (Main board ← DPRAM3 board)
5.REAL DATA TX
Real time communication data (Main board → DPRAM3 board)
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 31 / 90
3.3 Fault Analysis Menu 3.3.1 Fault History Menu Category
Function
[1] VIEW ALL
One-by-one display of the entire disorder information stored in the system memory (They are displayed in the order from the most recently occurred disorder information.)
[2] SPECIFIC DATE
View certain day’s (year/month/day) disorder information
[3] STATISTICS
Analyze the total number of disorder occurrences on each year/month/day (disorder statistics)
3.3.2 RESET History Menu Category
Function
[1] VIEW ALL
Sequential display of the entire reset information stored in the system memory
[2] SPECIFIC DATE
Views system reset information on a certain date (year/month/day)
[3] STATISTICS
Analyzes the number of the total reset event occurrences for each year/month/day (disorder statistics)
Event Type
Description
POWER OFF
System power OFF
POWER ON
System power ON
BUTTON RST
System reset occurrence by reset button
SOFT RST
System reset occurrence by software upgrade
WDOG RST
Watch-Dog reset occurrence
LVD RST JTAG RST
Low voltage(Low Voltage) reset occurrence JTAG reset occurrence
1) VIEW ALL Same key operations as in FAULT HISTORY menu 2) SPECIFIC DATE Same key operations as in FAULT HISTORY menu 3) STATISTICS Same key operations as in FAULT HISTORY menu
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
3.3.3 UCM ERR Reset Car starting with door open (UCM: Unintended Car Movement) error occurrence reset.
None ER_UCM [000] 3.UCM ERR RESET ARE YOU SURE?
5 ENT
2.0 2014-05-30 32 / 90
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 33 / 90
3.4 Trip Computer Menu Category
Function Displays the accumulated number of driving, driving time, and driving distance information Displays the number of section driving, driving time, and driving distance information
[1] ODOMETER [2] TRIPMETER [3] BRAKE COUNTER
Displays the number of BRAKE activations information
[4] DOOR COUNTER
Displays the number of DOOR operations information
[5] TRIP RESET
COUNTER information initialization
3.4.1 ODOMETER Displayed Contents Time Count Travel
Description Displays the total accumulated driving time information in the format of hour/minute/second (In automatic and manual operation, it calculates the actual driving time of the CAR.) Displays the number of the total accumulated driving information (brake open → driving → brake close is calculated as 1 time) Displays the total accumulated driving distance information in meter unit
ODOMETER information calculates the time, number of times, and distance information after completing the overall height measurement operation. It cannot be changed/modified like the odometer of automobiles. 3.4.2 TRIPMETER It displays the same contents as ODOMETER information. (But, it can be initialized using COUNTER RESET menu.) 3.4.3 BRAKE COUNTER Brake open → brake close is calculated as 1 time (initialization possible: use COUNTER RESET menu) 3.4.4 DOOR COUNTER Each DOOR OPEN (OPEN command → stop) or CLOSE (CLOSE command → stop) is calculated as 1 time. (initialization possible: use COUNTER RESET menu)
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL 3.4.5 TRIP RESET Menu Category
Function
[1] RESET TRIPMETER
TRIPMETER information initialization
[2] RESET BRAKE DATA
BRAKE COUNTER information initialization
[3] RESET DOOR DATA
DOOR COUNTER information initialization
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 34 / 90
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 35 / 90
3.5 Software Information Menu Category
Function
[1] SW VERSION
RTOS and SYSTEM SOFTWARE version information display
[2] SW BUILD DATE
SYSTEM SOFTWARE generation date information display
[3] CPU USAGE
•
SYSTEM SOFTWA RE CPU usage ratio display
•
CPU Usage: CPU usage ratio of the system control program
•
CPU Speed: Clock speed of the system CPU
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL Menu Category
1.
DRIVE MODE
1. 2.
PARKING DRV ATT DRV
3.
MOVE(IND) DRV
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
LOBBY RETURN VIP SERVICE AUTO RE-LEVEL QUIET NIGHT DRV FIRE EVACUATION FIRE FIGHTER DRV SEISMIC DRV ELD DRV
12. EMP(ATS) DRV
2.
OPTIONAL DATA
3.
FLOOR DATA
4.
DOOR DATA
13. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1.
PIT FLOOD DRV GROUP MODE DSS MODE INDICATOR DATA CAR LCD DISPLAY CAR TOUCH SCREEN SUPERVISORY ANNOUNCEMENT SKIP OPERATION SUB BRAKE TYPE BRAKE OFF DELAY MOTOR COOLING BRAKE SW OPTION FLOOR NON-STOP FLOOR DISPLAY FLOOR BASEMENT FLOOR TOTAL FLOOR FORCE STOP FLOOR RMS PEAK DOOR TIME
2.
LANDING OPEN
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
NUDGING FUNC HOLD OPEN DOOR TYPE HNPS system DOOR TIME EXT DOOR LOAD DETECT
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 36 / 90
Contents Set / release Parking operation function Set / release ATT(guide) operation function Set / release Moving operation function (same as IND operation) Set / release Base floor return operation function Set / release VIP operation function Set / release Re-level operation function Set / release Night time silence operation function Set / release Fire return (FMR) function Set / release Firefighter operation function Set / release Earthquake control operation function Set / release Emergency battery operation function Set / release Self power generation control operation function Set / release PIT flooding control operation function Set / release Group operation Set / release Destination floor reservation device Set CPI, HPI, HIP indicator display Set / release CAR internal LCD display Set / release CAR touch screen call function Set / release CRT monitoring panel function Set / release Voice synthesis device function Set / release Owner skip operation function Set sub brake type Set brake OFF(close) delay time Set / release Motor overheating prevention function Select brake confirm switch wiring scheme Set Non-stop floor information Set CPI, HIP, HPI floor display information Set Underground floor information Check the maximum number of floors Set / release forced stop at special floor function Set up or down peak floor(Controlled by Supervisory) Set Door standby time Set / release Door open during landing function (LANDING OPEN) Set / release Nudging function Set / release Door open standby function Set Door type for each floor (Heavy / Normal) Set / release Hand nipping protection function Set / release prolong the door open time function Set / release Door over load detect function
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL Menu Category
5.
CALL DATA
6.
TIMER DATA
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 1. 2. 3. 4.
MANUAL CALL 2nd TOUCH CANCEL FAKE CALL CANCEL DISABLED PERSON HALL CALL PASS CARD KEY CALL CALL PROCESS OPT HALL BUTTON JAM CAGE LIGHT OFF CAGE FAN OFF CURRENT TIME CHANGE TIME
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 37 / 90
Contents Register CAR call and Hall call using HHT Set / release 2-touch call cancel function Set / release Fake CAR call function Set / release Handicap call function Set / release Hall call pass function Set / release Card key call function Select Call process scheme(EACH / BATCH) Set / release Hall button jamming detection function Set CAR internal light off time Set CAR internal fan off time Check current time of the system Change system time
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 38 / 90
4. How to Set Up Data 4.1 Drive Mode 4.1.1 Parking DRV Setting Category
Contents
PARK FLOOR
Return floor information during PARKING operation Door status after arriving at PARKING floor
DOOR OPENED PRAK
•
0:Maintian door open → door time passes → door close
•
1: Maintain door open status
•
OK : It is displayed when floor setting is completed.
•
ERR : It is displayed when the input floor information is incorrect (Non-stop Floor, etc.). Check Non-stop Floor information to see if the floor can be serviced
4.1.2 ATT DRV ① setting:
1
ENT
② release:
0
ENT
③ cancel:
ESC
ENT
② release:
0
ENT
③ cancel:
ESC
4.1.3 Move(IND) DRV ① setting:
1
4.1.4 Lobby Return Setting Category
Contents
LOBBY FLOOR
Input return base floor information Input base floor return standby time (unit: min.) Input of 1 ~ 255 min. is possible.
TIME(min)
① setting:
1
ENT
② release:
0
ENT
③ cancel:
ESC
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 39 / 90
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 40 / 90
4.1.5 VIP Service Setting Category
Contents
1ST FLOOR
Input 1st VIP service standby floor information
2ND FLOOR
Input 2nd VIP service standby floor information
① setting:
1
ENT
② release:
0
ENT
③ cancel:
ESC
ENT
② release:
0
ENT
③ cancel:
ESC
4.1.6 Auto Re-Level ① setting:
1
•
DOOR OPENED RELEVEL : Set whether re-level operation is possible while door is opened in the landing zone
•
0 : Re-level operation only when door is closed 1 : Re-level operation when door is closed + re-level operation when door is open
4.1.7 Quiet Night DRV ① setting:
1
② release:
ENT
0
ENT
Setting Category
③ cancel:
Contents
1) volume control
-. Set /release Announcement speaker volume reduction
2) speed control
-. Set /release Drive velocity reduction
3) Drive period
ESC
-. Set drive duration
•
Input time data in 24 hours unit.
•
If you do not want to change the time: press ESC key
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 41 / 90
Ex) If it is 8:00PM: 2000 If it is 7:15AM: 0715 4.1.8 Fire Evacuation Setting Category
Contents
1ST FLOOR
1st fire escape floor information
2ND FLOOR
2nd fire escape floor information
① setting:
1
ENT
② release:
ENT
② release:
0
ENT
③ cancel:
ESC
4.1.9 Fire Fighter DRV ① setting:
1
0
ENT
③ cancel:
ESC
4.1.10 Seismic DRV Menu Category
Function
Primary Wave
Set / release P wave earthquake control operation
Secondary Wave
Set / release S wave earthquake control operation
① setting:
1
ENT
② release:
0
② release:
0
ENT
③ cancel:
ESC
③ cancel:
ESC
4.1.11 ELD DRV ① setting:
1
ENT
ENT
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 42 / 90
4.1.12 EMP (ATS) DRV Setting Category
Contents
RETURN FLOOR
① setting:
1
Set self power generation final destination floor information
ENT
② release:
0
ENT
③ cancel:
ESC
ENT
② release:
0
ENT
③ cancel:
ESC
4.1.13 PIT Flood DRV ① setting
1
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
2.0 2014-05-30 43 / 90
4.2 Optional Data 4.2.1 Group Mode ① setting:
1
ENT
② release:
0
ENT
③ cancel: ESC
ENT
② release:
0
ENT
③ cancel: ESC
4.2.2 DSS Mode ① setting:
1
If GROUP MODE is set to 0(OFF), even if you set DSS MODE to 1(ON), the call request(CALL) of the destination floor reservation device (HTS) will not be properly registered.
4.2.3 Indicator Data Setting Category
Contents
1) CAR INDICATOR
-. Set CAR side indicator data
2)HALL INDICATOR
-. Set HALL side indicator data
3) NEW INDICATOR
-. Set New type indicator data
4) HALL ERR DISPLY
-. Set "ERR" display at system malfunction status
1) CAR INDICATOR 2) HALL INDICATOR Data
Description
Data
Description
FULL
Full
MOVE
Moving
EMER
Emergency operation
USE
In use
INSP
Under inspection
NONE
No display
AUTO
Automatic operation
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 44 / 90
3) NEW INDICATOR Data
Description
LED1[PWR-SAVE]
Display the "POWER-SAVE"
LED2[ANTI-VRS]
Display the "ANTI-VIRUS"
LED3[ANTI-BUG]
Display the "ANTI-BUG"
LED4[CAMERA]
Display the "CCTV RECORDING"
4.2.4 CAR LCD Display ① setting:
ENT
② release:
0
ENT
③ cancel:
ESC
ENT
② release:
0
ENT
③ cancel:
ESC
ENT
② release:
0
ENT
③ cancel:
ESC
③ cancel:
ESC
1
4.2.5 CTS Board ① setting:
1
4.2.6 Supervisory ① setting:
1
Data
Description
1)RMS & HRTS
Set / release Supervisory system
2) OSD option
Not applicable
3)RESET RMS DATA
Clear all supervisory data
4.2.7 Announcement ① setting:
1
ENT
② release:
0
ENT
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 45 / 90
4.2.8 Skip Operation Data
Description
1)VIEW & CHANGE
Checks and changes the setting of SKIP floor information for each floor
2) ALL SET TO 1
Sets entire floor to SKIP
3)ALL SET TO 0
Resets entire floor SKIP information
① setting:
1
ENT
② release:
0
ENT
③ cancel:
ESC
After completing SKIP floor setting, when you activate EVEN / ODD switch in COP, SKIP will be operated.
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 46 / 90
4.2.9 Sub Brake Type Use UP or DN key to select the desired data value, and press ENT key. Data
Description
CAR BRAKE
Apply CAR brake
ROPE BRAKE
Apply rope brake
NONE
No sub brake
4.2.10 Brake Off Delay Use UP or DN key to select the desired data value, and press ENT key. Data
Description
NONE
No BRAKE close delay
250ms DELAY
Brake close delay of 250ms (0.25 sec.)
300ms DELAY
Brake close delay of 300ms (0.3 sec.)
350ms DELAY
Brake close delay of 350ms (0.35 sec.)
600ms DELAY
Brake close delay of 600ms (0.6 sec.)
800ms DELAY
Brake close delay of 800ms (0.8 sec.)
1000ms DELAY
Brake close delay of 1000ms (1 sec.)
4.2.11 Motor Cooling
① setting:
1
ENT
② release:
0
ENT
③ cancel:
ESC
TIME (min): Elevator operation stop time when motor is overheated (min. 10 min. ~ max. 255 min.) 4.2.12 Brake SW OPTION Use UP or DN key to select the desired data value, and press ENT key. Data
Description
SERIAL WIRING
Select serial connection of BKAS and BKBS brake confirm switch
PARALLEL WIRING
Select parallel connection of BKAS and BKBS brake confirm switch
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 47 / 90
4.3 Floor Data 4.3.1 Floor Non-Stop Menu Category
Function
[1] VIEW & CHANGE
Checks and changes the setting of NON-STOP information for each floor
[2] ALL SET TO 1
Sets entire floor to NON-STOP
[3] ALL SET TO 0
Resets entire floor NON-STOP information
1) View & Change
Floor information Status of the corresponding floor setting status
Key Operations
UP or DN
ENT
ESC
Description Move through the floor sequentially and select NON STOP set(1) or reset(0) Every time UP or DN key is pressed, floor information is increased or decreased by 1at a time. When UP or DN key is pressed for 1 or more sec., the floor information is increased or decreased rapidly. At the floor to set, when you press ENT, the arrow (←) moves to the data setting position. After selecting set(1) or reset(0) using Use UP / DN key, when you press ENT, the corresponding value is set, and the arrow (←) moves to the floor setting position. Cancels setting and moves to the upper level menu
2) All Set to 1 When “ARE YOU SURE?” message is displayed, you can select execute or cancel by the following key operations. ENT
Change completed
ESC
Cancel change
3) All Set to 0 When “ARE YOU SURE?” message is displayed, you can select execute or cancel by the following key operations. ENT
Change completed
ESC
Cancel change
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 48 / 90
4.3.2 Floor Display Menu Category
Function
[1] VIEW & CHANGE
Checks and changes the status of FLOOR DISPLAY CODE setting status of each floor
[2] INIT FL CODE
Initializes FLOOR DISPLAY CODE initialization for entire floor
1) View & Change
Floor information Status of the corresponding floor display information
•
Alphabet lower case letter x means no display. Ex) 1 x x: It only displays ‘1’ on the first position among the 3 characters that can be displayed. That is, it is displayed as “1” on COP, HIP, HPI, etc.
• Display Data WBVF model does not use a separate DISPLAY CODE, and the method of direct input of the contents to be displayed for each floor is used, and you can input up to 3 characters. Ex) When you display underground floor 1 as B1. Previous method
61 (hex)
WBVF
B1x
Key Operations
UP or DN
ENT
ESC
Description Move through the floors sequentially, and select DISPLAY DATA value. Every time UP or DN key is pressed, floor information is increased or decreased by 1at a time. When UP or DN key is pressed for 1 or more sec., the floor information is increased or decreased rapidly. At the floor to set, when you press ENT, the arrow (←) moves to the data setting position. After selecting DATA value using Use UP / DN key, when you press ENT, the corresponding value is set, and the arrow (←) moves to the floor setting position. Cancels setting and moves to the upper level menu
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 49 / 90
2) INIT FL Code When “ARE YOU SURE?” message is displayed, you can select execute or cancel by the following key operations.
ENT
Change completed
ESC
Cancel change
When you execute INIT FL CODE, the previously set floor display information is initialized to display sequentially from the 1st floor. But, if an underground floor is set, it is initialized considering the underground floor. EX) If there is no underground floor: initialized in the order of 1xx, 2xx, 3xx…… If there are 3 underground floors: initialized in the order of B3x, B2x, B1x, 1xx, 2xx, 3xx……
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 50 / 90
4.3.3 Floor Basement •
Change underground floor information:
•
Maintain current floor information:
•
Input the number of total underground floors
ENT
ESC
When you set the underground floor information, Display Code is automatically changed based on the inputted underground floor information. Ex) If you change the underground floor information from 0 → 9 in a building with the max. number of floors as 20, 1 ~ 9 floor → B9x~ B1x 10 ~ 20 floor → 1xx ~ 11x The max. number of underground floors that can be set is “9”.If input is 10 or more, ERR is displayed.
4.3.4 Floor Total The number of max. operation floors set in the current system (cannot be changed.).
4.3.5 FLOOR FORCE STOP ① setting:
1
ENT
② release:
0
Menu Category
ENT
Function
STOP FLOOR
Set forced stop service floor
NEW S_TIME
Sets the start time of forced stop service
NEW E_TIME
Sets the end time of forced stop service
•
Input time data in 24 hours unit.
•
If you do not want to change the time: press ESC key Ex) If it is 8:00PM: 2000 If it is 7:15AM: 0715
③ cancel:
ESC
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL 4.3.6 FLOOR RMS PEAK Menu Category
Function
UP PEAK
Setting
the peak floor of rising directions
DN PEAK
Setting
the peak floor of falling directions
PRE LUNCH
Setting the peak floor of before lunch
POST LUNCH
Setting the peak floor of after lunch
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 51 / 90
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 52 / 90
4.4 Door Data 4.4.1 Door Time
Use UP or DN key to select the following categories and press ENT key. Category
Contents
STANDARD(sec)
Standard door standby time (min. 5 sec. ~ max. 255 sec. input possible)
HANDICAP(sec)
Handicap door standby time (min. 10 sec. ~ max. 255 sec. input possible)
CAR CALL(sec)
CAR call door standby time (min. 3 sec. ~ max. 255 sec. input possible)
HALL CALL(sec)
Hall call door standby time (min. 5 sec. ~ max. 255 sec. input possible)
4.4.2 Landing Open ① setting:
1
ENT
② release:
0
ENT
0
ENT
③ cancel:
ESC
4.4.3 Nudging Func ①
setting: 1
ENT
② release:
③ cancel:
ESC
TIME (sec): Long period door nudging time (SE or EE operation) function recognition time (min. 30 sec. ~ max. 255 sec.)
4.4.4 Hold Open ①
setting: 1
ENT
② release:
0
ENT
③ cancel: ESC
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 53 / 90
When you set HOLD OPEN mode, if there is no CAR call or hall call in automatic operation mode, door will always standby with door open. 4.4.5 Door Type Menu Category
Function
[1] VIEW & CHANGE
Checks and changes the door status information setting status of each floor
[2] ALL SET TO 1
Sets the entire floor as Heavy Door
[3] ALL SET TO 0
Sets the entire floor as Standard Door
1) View & Change
Floor information Status of the corresponding floor door setting status
Key Operations
UP or DN
ENT
ESC
•
HVY(1): Heavy Door
•
STD(0): Standard Door
Description Move through the floors sequentially, and select door setting value. Every time UP or DN key is pressed, floor information is increased or decreased by 1at a time. When UP or DN key is pressed for 1 or more sec., the floor information is increased or decreased rapidly. At the floor to set, when you press ENT, the arrow (←) moves to the data setting position. After selecting DATA value using Use UP / DN key, when you press ENT, the corresponding value is set, and the arrow (←) moves to the floor setting position. Cancels setting and moves to the upper level menu
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
2.0 2014-05-30 54 / 90
2) All Set to 1 When “ARE YOU SURE?” message is displayed, you can select execute or cancel by the following key operations. Change Completed
ENT
Cancel change
ESC
3) All Set to 0 When “ARE YOU SURE?” message is displayed, you can select execute or cancel by the following key operations. Change completed
ENT
Cancel change
ESC
4.4.6 HNPS SYSTEM ①
setting: 1
ENT
② release:
0
ENT
③ cancel: ESC
ENT
② release:
0
ENT
③ cancel: ESC
4.4.7 DOOR TIME EXT ①
setting: 1
Setting Category
Contents Input base floor return standby time (unit: min.) Input of 1 ~ 255 min. is possible.
TIME(min)
4.4.8 DOOR LOAD DETECT ①
setting: 1
ENT
② release:
0
ENT
③ cancel: ESC
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 55 / 90
4.5 Call Data 4.5.1 Manual Call
Use UP or DN key to select the following categories, and press ENT key. Category
Contents
1.
CAR CALL
2.
UP HALL CALL
UP direction hall call registration
3.
DN HALL CALL
DOWN direction hall call registration
Key Operations
Description
UP or DN
ENT
ESC
CAR call registration
Every time UP or DN key is pressed, floor information is increased or decreased by 1at a time. When UP or DN key is pressed for 1 or more sec., the floor information is increased or decreased rapidly. At the floor to set, when you press ENT, the arrow (←) moves to the data setting position. After selecting DATA value using Use UP / DN key, when you press ENT, the corresponding value is set, and the arrow (←) moves to the floor setting position. Cancels setting and moves to the upper level menu
•
OK : CALL input for the floor that can be serviced is displayed.
•
ERR : It is displayed when there is a CALL input for a floor that cannot be serviced (NON-STOP or DUMMY FLOOR).
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 56 / 90
4.5.2 2nd Touch Cancel Menu Category
Function
1.NORMAL CAR CALL
Set / release 2-touch Car call cancel function
2.NORMAL HALL CALL
Set / release 2-touch Hall call cancel function
3.HANDI CAR CALL
Set / release 2-touch handicapped Car call cancel function
4.HANDI HALL CALL
Set / release 2-touch handicapped Hall call cancel function
4.5.3 Fake Call Cancel ①
setting: 1
ENT
② release:
0
ENT
③ cancel
ESC
•
CAR CALL COUNT : Number of the registered CAR calls required to detect FAKE CALL. (Minimum value)
•
You can register from min. 4. (Default value: 6)
•
If the current CAR load ratio is less than 30%, and the number of the registered CAR calls is the same or bigger than the value set in the CAR CALL COUNT, it is recognized as a FAKE CAR call.
•
Processing of FAKE calls FAKE CAR call when the CAR is stopped : delete all registered CAR calls as soon as it is recognized FAKE CAR call when CAR is in driving status : After stopping at the nearest destination floor, delete all registered CAR calls.
•
Handicap CAR calls are excluded from the FAKE CAR call detection targets.
4.5.4 Disabled Call ① setting:
1
ENT
② release:
0
ENT
0
ENT
③ cancel:
ESC
4.5.5 Hall Call Pass 1
ENT
ESC
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL ② release:
① setting:
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 57 / 90
③ cancel:
4.5.6 Card Key Call Menu Category 1. CARD-KEY CALL
2.CARD-KEY FLOOR
Function 1)HELCO STANDARD
Push COP call button after the CARD KEY contact
2)ATUTO CALL
Use CARD KEY only
3)AUTO CALL + BTN
AUTO CALL or Push COP call button with Privilege CARD KEY
1)VIEW & CHANGE
Checks and changes the setting of CARD KEY information for each floor
2)ALL SET TO 1
Sets entire floor to CARD KEY service
3)ALL SET TO 0
Resets entire floor CARD KEY service
4.5.7 CALL PROCESS OPT Menu Category EACH
CALL
BATCH CALL
Function Individual process Normal COP call and handicapped COP call batch process Normal COP call and handicapped COP call
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 58 / 90
4.6 Timer Data 4.6.1 Cage Light Off ① time change:
time data input
ENT
② maintain current data:
ESC
CAGE LIGHT OFF time can have input of 5(default value) ~ 255(max. value), and the unit is min.
4.6.2 Cage Fan Off ① time change:
time data input
ENT
② maintain current data:
ESC
CAGE FAN OFF time can have input of 5(default value) ~ 255(max. value), and the unit is min.
4.6.3 Current Time
Display Category
Contents
DATE
Displayed in the format of Year. Month. Day (Day of Week)
TIME
Displayed in the format of Hour (2 digits) : Minute (2 digits) : second (2 digits) (Hour is displayed in the format of 24 hours.)
4.6.4 Change Time
•
How to Input Date and Time
YYMMDD
Input date information with year (2 digits) month (2 digits) day (2 digits) and press ENT key. Ex) 2013. 2. 02: 130502 If date change is not necessary input ESC key (Current date is displayed)
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
HHMMSS
2.0 2014-05-30 59 / 90
Input time information with hour (2 digits) minute (2 digits) second (2 digits) and press ENT key. Ex) 6:36PM: 183625
5. Error Information HHT displayed 5.1 Error Code Classification Error Code Classification
Critical Error (When the disorder occurs, operation is not possible)
Minor Error (Try to avoid disorder or simply save the disorder information)
Contents 1 ~ 20
Safety circuit related
Error
21 ~ 40
Inverter related
41 ~ 50
Brake related
51 ~ 70
Limit switch and landing sensor related
71 ~ 80
Communication related
81 ~ 90
Door related
91 ~ 100
Inverter and door related
101 ~ 110
Limit switch and door related
111 ~ 120
Communication related
121 ~ 130
Door inverter related
131 ~ 140
Other
Error Error Error
Error
Error Error Error
Error Error
Errors
5.2 Display Information Error Indicated •
It displays disorder name and disorder code at the same time for all disorders defined in the system.
•
All names start with header ER_, and it is displayed up to max. of 15 characters according to the disorder type. Operation mode
Landing location and floor information Door status Disorder information
Current time of the system
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 60 / 90
Description of the displayed contents Status of the landing sensor status Current floor (floor displayed on the indicator)
Status of the sensor landing at the top of the CAR 1: Absolute floor B1: Floor displayed on CAR and floor indicator
Time information
Hour : Min. : Sec.
Operation mode
None: No operation mode due to a critical disorder (Refer to HHT manual for detail operation mode displays)
Door status
Disorder name
Door operation status (Refer to HHT manual for detail displays) •
It displays the name and the corresponding code of the disorder currently occurred disorder
•
If multiple disorders occurred, it displays the disorder with the highest priority
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 61 / 90
6. Data Table for Analysis Error (Reference Table) 6.1 GPIO Data (Hardware INPUT/OUTPUT Port Status) (1): High when it is in operation, Description
(0): Low when it is in operation
Input
Order of signal
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
INPUT_1
DS(1)
MTR(0)
MD(1)
MU(1)
MCS(1)
AUTO(1)
MC2(0)
SA(0)
INPUT_2
PLUM(1)
PLUH(1)
PLUL(1)
ULS(0)
BKBS(1)
BKAC(0)
BKAS(1)
GS(1)
INPUT_3
DZ(1)
DL(1)
UL(1)
RBL(0)
DLS(0)
PLDL(1)
PLDH(1)
PLDM(1)
INPUT_4
CCS(0)
UCM(1)
THS(1)
ELDI(1)
EQP(1)
EQS(1)
RBKI(1)
FMR2(1)
INPUT_5
GOV(0)
ESTOP(0)
UFL(0)
DFL(0)
PIT(0)
UDC(1)
CTOL(0)
-
INPUT_6
-
-
-
-
P24V(1)
PLDH2(1)
PLUH2(1)
RDZ(1)
INPUT_7
-
-
-
-
RUNA(1)
BKO(1)
ZSP(1)
INPUT_8
Description
Output
Order of signal
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
OUT_1
SAFE (1)
ELDE (1)
DX (1)
RBK (1)
BKP (1)
BKB (1)
BKA (1)
MC2 (1)
OUT_2 OUT_3 OUT_4 OUT_5 OUT_6 OUT_7 OUT_8
FR2 (1)
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 62 / 90
6.2 Inverter Data Description
Inverter → Control System
Order of signal
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Fr_INV1
ANGLDCT
INITOK
FLRDIR
PTNOUT
RUNOPN
DEC3
DEC2
DEC1
Fr_INV2
SDSERR MXFLRDN MXFLRUP INITFAIL
POSIERR
Fr_INV3
NOCALL NEARSTP INVERR
SUDSDCL FLTDRV DCLFLERR
WDT
MAX_FLR
The max. floor for operation
DEC_FLR
Floor that can be decelerated
CUR_FLR
Current floor
LOAD(%)
Load ratio (%)
SPEED
Current driving speed
CURPOSI
Absolution position information (mm)
Description
Control System → Inverter
ANTISTAL SDSWRN
Order of signal
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
To_INV1
RESCU
ELD
INIT
RELEVEL
NEAR
CRTL
MANUAL
AUTO
WDT
UPDN
MANDECL
HIGH
DN
UP
READY
MODE4
MODE3
MODE2
MODE1
To_INV2 To_INV3 CALL_FLR
Driving destination floor information
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 63 / 90
6.3 Door Inverter Data Description
Door Inverter → Control System
Order of signal
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Fr_DINV1
DCL(1)
DOL(1)
SE(1)
EE(1)
AUTO(1)
ONS(1)
DCB(1)
DOB(1)
CL_ACT(1)
OP_ACT(1)
INITOK(1)
Torque(1)
ERR(1)
Fr_DINV2 Fr_DINV3
MODE
Fr_DINV4
Floor with door inverter overload
Fr_DINV5 Fr_DINV6 Fr_DINV7
Door inverter error code
Fr_DINV8
Door inverter program version
Description
Control System → Door Inverter
Order of signal
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
To_DINV1
FR1(1)
FMR(1)
LIGHT(1)
FAN(1)
RESET(1)
NUG(1)
CLX(1)
OPX(1)
To_DINV2
HEAVY DOOR floor information
To_DINV3
Current floor information
To_DINV4 To_DINV5 To_DINV6 To_DINV7 To_DINV8
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 64 / 90
6.4 COP Data Description Order of signal
COP Board → Control System 8
7
Fr_COP1 Fr_COP2
6
5
LD110(1) LD100(1) EACH(1)
ODD(1)
4
3
2
1
LD70(1)
LD30(1)
DCB(1)
DOB(1)
EVEN(1) MOVE(1) ATTPASS(1) ATTDN(1) ATTUP(1)
Fr_COP3
INS(1)
DCS(1)
ATT(1)
FR1(1) LHPWR(1) CDKEY(1)
Fr_COP4 Fr_COP5 Fr_COP6 Fr_COP7 Fr_COP8
Description
Control System → COP Board
Order of signal
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
To_COP1
DST
CHIME
BUZZER
DFD
DN
UP
DCBL
DOBL
VCANCEL
VRDOOR
VFDOOR
VCL
VOP
VUPDN
VFLST
VEQ
VFIRE
VOVLD
VFAULT
To_COP2 To_COP3 To_COP4
VFLOOR 1st (ASCII Code)
To_COP5
VFLOOR 2nd(ASCII Code)
To_COP6
VFLOOR 3rd(ASCII Code)
To_COP7 To_COP8
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 65 / 90
7. How to Analysis Error of WBVF System •
WBVF system can store up to max. of 3270 malfunctions information.
•
The real time input/output data at the time of the malfunction occurrence and the real time input/output data at the time of the corresponding malfunction reset are also stored in the system memory.
7.1 Error Information of HHT Menu HHT FAULT ANALYSIS menu is composed as follows. Fault Analysis
1.
FAULT HISTORY
[1] VIEW ALL
Sequentially displays all disorder information stored in the system memory (It is displayed in the order of the most recently occurred disorder information.)
[2] SPECIFIC DATE
Views disorder information of certain date (year/month/day)
[3] STATISTICS [1] VIEW ALL 2.
RESET HISTORY
[2] SPECIFIC DATE [3] STATISTICS
3.
UCM ERROR RESET
Contents
Analysis of the number of the total disorder occurrences for each year/month/day (statistics) Sequentially displays the entire system reset and power ON/OFF information stored in the system memory Views system reset and power ON/OFF information of certain date (year/month/day) Analysis of the number of the total event occurrences for each year/month/day (statistics) Start with door open (UCM: Unintended Car Movement) error reset
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 66 / 90
7.2 How to Use HHT for Analysis Error 7.2.1 Fault History 1)
1
View ALL Menu
Malfunction index (accumulated number)
2
Malfunction name
3
Malfunction code
4
Malfunction status (occurrence/reset)
1
2
3
4
•
Malfunction occurrence order index (As the number is higher, it is more recently occurred malfunction)
• Max. 3270 can be stored (displays 1 ~ 3270) Name of the disorder occurred/reset (Expressed with max. 14 characters) Unique code of the malfunction occurred/reset (Expressed with 3 digit decimal numbers) Malfunction status information (ON : disorder occurrence, OFF : malfunctionr reset)
•
In the initial display screen, every time DN key is pressed, the malfunction information (max. 3270) accumulated in the memory is sequentially displayed.
•
When the menu is executed, the first disorder displayed on the screen is the most recently occurred/reset disorder.
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 67 / 90
2) Detail Malfunction Data Analysis ① In the basic disorder information display screen, if you press ENT key, you can view the corresponding malfunction occurrence/reset time and the input/output signal, various CAN communication data, and operation mode information, etc. at the time of and malfunction occurrence/reset time. ② In the detail malfunction information display screen, if you press DN key, INPUT, OUTPUT, and CAN data are displayed one by one. ③ In the detail malfunction information display screen, if you press ESC key, it returns to the basic malfunction information screen.
ENT
DN
ENT
3)
DN
Specific Date Menu
Auto_Drive Door_Closed (2)SPECIFIC DATE YYMMDD : ←
5
•
When you input the date to view in the order of year (2 digits), month (2 digits), and day (2 digits) in the above screen, the malfunction occurrence and reset list of the corresponding date is sequentially displayed.
•
How to input the date for the disorder analysis EX) 2013. 4. 30: Input 130430 and press ENT key
•
If there are a lot of accumulated malfunction information in the system memory, it requires about 4~5 sec.
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 68 / 90
4) List of Reference when You Analysis Disorder ① The index value displayed on the third line of the first displayed screen means the number of the total malfunctions on the corresponding date. ② In the first displayed screen, every time you press DN key, it is displayed in the order of the occurrence/reset on the corresponding date. ③ In the basic malfunction information display screen, if you press ENT key, the detail data information of the corresponding disorder information is displayed. (Analysis method for detail malfunction information is the same as VIEW ALL menu.) ④ If there is no corresponding disorder information on the inputted date, “NO DATA!” message is displayed for 1.5 sec., and it is automatically converted to FAULT HISTORY initial screen. 5) Statistics Menu ① When the menu is first executed, it displays the number of total malfunctions in each year by analyzing the entire malfunction information stored in the system memory.
② If you input ENT key in year, the number of the total malfunctions in each month of the corresponding year is displayed.
③ If you input ENT key in month, the number of the total malfunctions in each day of the corresponding year is displayed.
6) How to Utilize the Disorder Statistics Information For the detail disorder list of each day analyzed in the statistics information, you can check the detail malfunction list of the corresponding day using SPECIFIC DATE menu.
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 69 / 90
7.2.2 Reset History 1)
View All Menu Menu Category
Function •
Sequentially displays all the reset and power ON/OFF information stored in the system memory
•
It can store max. of 512 (Expressed as 1 ~ 512 )
[1] VIEW ALL [2] SPECIFIC DATE
Views the system reset information of a certain date (year/month/day)
[3] STATISTICS
Analysis of the number of the total reset event occurrences for each year/month/day (disorder statistics)
Event Type
Description
POWER OFF
System power OFF
POWER ON
System power ON
BUTTON RST
reset button operation 에 의한 system reset occurrence
SOFT RST
System reset occurred due to software upgrade
WDOG RST
Watch-Dog reset occurred
LVD RST
Low voltage(Low Voltage) reset occurred
JTAG RST
JTAG reset occurred
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
1 3
1
2.0 2014-05-30 70 / 90
2 4
•
Index (accumulated number)
2
Event name
3
Event occurred date/time
Reset event occurrence order index (as the number is higher, more recently occurred event)
• Max. 512 can be stored (Expressed as 1 ~ 512 ) Name of the occurred event (Refer to the event type on the previous page) Date and time of the occurrence of the corresponding event Year(2) Month(2) Day(2) / Hour(2) : Minute(2) : Second(2)
DN
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
DN
2) Specific Date It is the same as the key operations of FAULT HISTORY menu. 3) Statistics It is the same as the key operations of FAULT HISTORY menu.
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 71 / 90
8. How to Resolve Error of WBVF System (Code 1~140) M code
1
Contents Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
2
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
3
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
4
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
5
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
6
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
7
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
ER_P24V_OFF No 24V power signal (detection condition maintaining time : 50ms) When it occurred during operation: emergency stop When it occurred while it was stopped: cannot activate Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 2A, and check AC220Vinput(A220, B220) and P24V output voltage of PS1 ER_SAFETY No safety circuit checking signal (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) When it occurred during operation: emergency stop When it occurred while it was stopped: cannot activate Use HHT Fault Analysis menu to verify safety circuit disconnection location (View disorder code 6 ~ 10 occurrences) Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 3A to check safety circuit. ER_UCM Out of door zone in automatic operation correct landing and door open status (detection condition maintaining time : 50 ms) Emergency stop and cannot activate It cannot be activated after system reset and power reset. After checking by repair personnel, manual reset using HHT UCM ERROR RESET menu Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 3A to check safety circuit Use HHT Fault Analysis menu to verify input/output signal status at the moment of the disorder occurrence (ZSP, MC2, BKAC, BKAS, DZ. etc.) ER_CAR_SLIP Out of door zone in automatic operation correct landing and door open status (detection condition maintaining time : 50 ms) After emergency stop, try nearest floor landing Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 3A to check safety circuit Use HHT Fault Analysis menu to verify input/output signal status at the moment of the disorder occurrence (ZSP, MC2, BKAC, BKAS, DZ. etc.) ER_MC2_OFF After MC2 ON output, there is no MC2 operation checking signal for certain time period (detection condition maintaining time : 400 ms) MC2 OFF output Same error occurs for 10 times in a row: function cannot be performed Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 3A to check MC2 A1, A2 connector diode, resistance, and condenser damage Check MC2 operation checking contact status and connection ER_MC2_ON In MC2 output OFF status, MC2 operation checking signal is detected (detection condition maintaining time: 2.5 sec) cannot activate Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 3A to check MC2 A1, A2 connector diode, resistance and condenser damage Check MC2 operation checking contact status and connection ER_ESTOP_SW Safety circuit disconnection CP ESTOP switch operation (detection condition maintaining time: 100ms) When it occurred during operation: emergency stop When it occurred while it was stopped: cannot activate For safety circuit disconnection location verification. Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 3A ESTOP switch operation status and
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 72 / 90
connection check
8
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
9
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
10
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
11
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
12
13
14
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
ER_PIT_BUF_SW Safety circuit disconnection by PIT switch operation (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) When it occurred during operation: emergency stop When it occurred while it was stopped: cannot activate For safety circuit disconnection location verification. Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 3A PIT buffer switch operation status and connection check ER_GOV Safety circuit disconnection by governor switch operation (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) When it occurred during operation: emergency stop When it occurred while it was stopped: cannot activate For safety circuit disconnection location verification. Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 3A governor switch operation status and connection check ER_UFL Safety circuit disconnection by the highest floor final limit switch operation(detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) When it occurred during operation: emergency stop When it occurred while it was stopped: cannot activate For safety circuit disconnection location verification. Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 3A the highest floor final switch operation status and connection check ER_DFL Safety circuit disconnection by the lowest floor final limit switch operation (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) When it occurred during operation: emergency stop When it occurred while it was stopped: cannot activate For safety circuit disconnection location verification. Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 3A the highest floor final switch operation status and connection check
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 73 / 90
ER_INV_COMM Main inverter program down (detection condition maintaining time : 500 ms) When it occurred during operation: emergency stop When it occurred while it was stopped: cannot activate Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check INVERTER DATA Fr_INV3 WDT bit change status
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
22
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
23
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
24
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
25
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
26
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
27
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
28
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 74 / 90
ER_INVERTER main inverter error occurrence (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) When it occurred during operation: emergency stop When it occurred while it was stopped: cannot activate Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check INVERTER DATA Fr_INV2 INVERR bit status Check HHT [1] INVERTER MENU 3.ERROR category ER_ZSP_OFF There is no zero speed signal when it is stopped and brake is closed (detection condition maintaining time: 2 sec) Emergency stop and cannot activate Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_7 ZSP bit status Check HHT [1] INVERTER MENU 3.ERROR category ER_ZSP ON Zero speed signal is maintained while there is driving command output and brake is open (detection condition maintaining time: 2 sec) Emergency stop and cancel driving command (reactivate when new driving condition occurs) Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_7 ZSP bit status Check HHT [1] INVERTER MENU 3.ERROR category ER_ANTISTALL When there is no deceleration signal after exceeding the predicted driving time (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) After emergency stop, if it goes out of\the
landing zone, try to return to the nearest floor
Check the highest floor forced deceleration switch(PLUL, PLUM, PLUH) and the lowest floor forced deceleration switch(PLDL, PLDM, PLDH) operation status ER_SPD_PTN_ON Speed pattern signal is detected when it is stopped and brake is closed (detection condition maintaining time: 2 sec) Cannot activate Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check INVERTER DATA Fr_INV1 PTNOUT bit status Check HHT [1] INVERTER MENU 3.ERROR category ER_SPD_PTN_OFF There is no speed pattern signal when it has driving command output and brake is open (detection condition maintaining time: 2 sec) Emergency stop and cancel driving command (Reactivate when there is a new driving condition) Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check INVERTER DATA Fr_INV1 PTNOUT bit status Check HHT [1] INVERTER MENU 3.ERROR category ER_RUNA_ON Inverter RUN signal detected when it is stopped and brake is closed (detection condition maintaining time: 1 sec) Cannot activate Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_7 RUNA bit status Check HHT [1] INVERTER MENU 3.ERROR category
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
29
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
30
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
31
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
32
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
33
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
34
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
35
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 75 / 90
ER_RUNA OFF There is no inverter RUN signal when it has driving command output and brake is open (detection condition maintaining time: 1 sec) Emergency stop and cancel driving command (Reactivate when a new driving condition occurs) Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_7 RUNA bit status Check HHT [1] INVERTER MENU 3.ERROR category ER_CREEP Cannot land for certain number of times or more during deceleration operation (detection condition maintaining time: 20 sec) After emergency stop, try to land on the nearest floor Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_3 DZ, DL, UL bit status Check CAR top part landing sensor operation status Check HHT [1] INVERTER MENU 3.ERROR category ER_INITIAL Overall height measurement failure (detection condition maintaining time : 500ms) Cannot activate(automatic operation impossible / manual operation possible) Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check INVERTER DATA Fr_INV1 INITOK bit status Use HHT Fault Analysis menu to analyze the cause of overall height measurement failure (View disorder code 32 ~ 35 occurrences) Check HHT [1] INVERTER MENU 3.ERROR category ER_DZ_OVER After overall height measurement, excessive number of door zones error occurred (detection condition maintaining time: 100ms) Cannot activate(automatic operation impossible / manual operation possible) Check HHT [1] INVERTER MENU MAX FLOOR setting Check CAR top part landing sensor operation status ER_DZ_SHORTAGE After overall height measurement, insufficient number of door zones error occurred (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) Cannot activate(automatic operation impossible / manual operation possible) Check HHT [1] INVERTER MENU MAX FLOOR setting Check CAR top part landing sensor operation status ER_DECEL_SW1 After overall height measurement, excessive or insufficient number of forced deceleration switches error occurred (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) Cannot activate(automatic operation impossible / manual operation possible) Check HHT [1] INVERTER MENU MAX FLOOR setting Check the highest floor forced deceleration switch(PLUL, PLUM, PLUH) and the lowest floor forced deceleration switch(PLDL, PLDM, PLDH) operation status ER_DECEL_SW2 After overall height measurement, forced deceleration switch exceeding 200mm error occurred (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) Cannot activate(automatic operation impossible / manual operation possible) Check HHT [1] INVERTER MENU MAX FLOOR setting Check the highest floor forced deceleration switch(PLUL, PLUM, PLUH) and the lowest floor forced deceleration switch(PLDL, PLDM, PLDH) installation position
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
36
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
37
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
38
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
39
40
41
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
42
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 76 / 90
ER_RELEVEL During re-level operation, it goes out of door zone(DZ) (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) Emergency stop and cancel driving command After emergency stop, close CAR door, and return to the nearest floor Check CAR top part landing sensor installation position and operation status Check HHT [1] INVERTER MENU 3.ERROR category ER_RELEVEL2 Re-level operation is maintained for 10 sec. or longer in door zone section (detection condition maintaining time: 10 sec) Emergency stop and cancel driving command (Reactivate when a new driving condition occurs) Check CAR top part landing sensor installation position and operation status Check HHT [1] INVERTER MENU 3.ERROR category ER_CONTROL After MC2 open output, there is no driving command output within 1 sec. (detection condition maintaining time: 1 sec) MC2 OFF output Check main board watchdog LED operation status Use HHT to check operation mode conversion status
ER_BKA_ON When there is no brake output, brake contact open signal is inputted (detection condition maintaining time: 1.5 sec) Output brake close and output MC2 OFF, maintain cannot activate status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 5A to check BKA A1, A2 connector diode damage Check BKA operation checking contact status and connection ER_BKA_OFF After brake open output, there is no brake contact open signal input (detection condition maintaining time: 1 sec) Output brake close and output MC2 OFF, maintain cannot activate status If the same error occurs 10 times in a row, maintain function impossible status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 5A to check BKA A1, A2 connector diode damage Check BKA operation checking contact status and connection
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
43
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
44
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
45
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions
46
Control action when disorder is detected Check points
47
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
48
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
49
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 77 / 90
ER_BKO_ON When there is no driving command, main inverter brake open output occurred (detection condition maintaining time: 1 sec) Output brake close and output MC2 OFF, maintain cannot activate status Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_7 BKO bit status Check HHT [1] INVERTER MENU 3.ERROR category ER_BKS_ON When there is no brake output, brake open checking switch operation signal is inputted (detection condition maintaining time: 1 sec) Output brake close and output MC2 OFF, maintain cannot activate status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 8A to check brake open checking switch operation status and connection status ER_BKO_OFF After driving command output, there is no brake open output from the main inverter (detection condition maintaining time: 1 sec) Emergency stop and cancel driving command (Reactivate when a new driving condition occurs) Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_7 BKO bit status Check HHT [1] INVERTER MENU 3.ERROR category ER_BKS_OFF After brake open output, there is no open checking switch operation signal (detection condition maintaining time: 1 sec) Emergency stop and cancel driving command (Reactivate when a new driving condition occurs) If the same error occurs 10 times in a row, maintain function impossible status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 8A to check brake open checking switch operation status and connection status ER_BKO_ON2 After manual operation deceleration command output, main inverter brake open output is maintained (detection condition maintaining time: 2 sec) Emergency stop and cancel driving command (Reactivate when a new driving condition occurs) Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_7 BKO bit status Check HHT [1] INVERTER MENU 3.ERROR category ER_RBKI_OFF After sub brake open output, there is no sub brake open checking signal input (detection condition maintaining time: 2 sec) Emergency stop and cancel driving command (Reactivate when a new driving condition occurs) Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 5A to check RRB or RBS switch operation status and connection status ER_RBKI_ON When there is no sub brake open output, sub brake open checking signal is inputted (detection condition maintaining time: 2 sec) Output main brake and sub brake close and output MC2 OFF, maintain cannot activate status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 5A to check RRB or RBS switch operation status and connection status
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
50
51
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
52
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
53
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
54
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
55
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
56
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 78 / 90
ER_ULS&DLS_ON Simultaneous input of the highest floor and the lowest floor limit switch signals (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) Cannot activate Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_2 ULS and INPUT_3 DLS bit status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 7A and COL. 26 to check ULS and DLS switch operation status and connection status ER_ULS RUN_UP During automatic operation UP direction driving, the highest floor limit switch signal is inputted (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) Emergency stop, cancel driving command, and try DOWN direction nearest floor landing Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_2 ULS bit status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 7A and COL. 26 to check ULS switch operation status and connection status ER_DLS RUN_DN During automatic operation DOWN direction driving., the lowest floor limit switch signal is inputted (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) Emergency stop, cancel driving command, and try UP direction nearest floor landing Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_3 DLS bit status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 7A and COL. 26 to check DLS switch operation status and connection status ER_PLUL OFF2 No PLUL signal at top floor Cannot activate Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_2 PLUL bit status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 7A and COL. 26 to check PLUL switch operation status and connection status ER_PLDL OFF2 No PLDL signal at bottom floor Cannot activate Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_2 PLDL bit status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 7A and COL. 26 to check PLDL switch operation status and connection status ER_PLUL_RUN_DN During automatic operation DOWN direction driving, the highest floor check signal is inputted where it is not the highest floor (detection condition maintaining time: 2 sec) Emergency stop, cancel driving command, and try nearest floor landing Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_2 PLUL bit status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 7A and COL. 26 to check PLUL switch operation status and connection status
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
57
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
58
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
59
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
60
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
61
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
62
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
63
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 79 / 90
ER_PLDL_RUN_UP During the automatic operation UP direction driving, the lowest floor check signal is inputted where it is not the lowest floor (detection condition maintaining time: 2 sec) Emergency stop, cancel driving command, and try nearest floor landing Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_3 PLDL bit status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 7A and COL. 26 to check PLDL switch operation status and connection status ER_PLUL&DL_ON When automatic operation is stopped, the highest floor and the lowest floor check signals are inputted at the same time (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) Cannot activate (automatic operation impossible, manual operation possible) Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_2 PLUL bit and INPUT_3 PLDL bit status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 7A and COL. 26 to check PLUL and PLDL switch operation status and connection status ER_PLUL_ON When automatic operation is stopped, the highest floor check signal is inputted where it is not the highest floor (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) Cannot activate (automatic operation impossible, manual operation possible) Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_2 PLUL bit status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 7A and COL. 26 to check PLUL switch operation status and connection status ER_PLDL_ON When automatic operation is stopped, the lowest floor check signal is inputted where it is not the lowest floor (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) Cannot activate (automatic operation impossible, manual operation possible) Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_3 PLDL bit status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 7A and COL. 26 to check PLDL switch operation status and connection status ER_PLUL_OFF When the automatic operation is stopped, there is no highest floor check signal at the highest floor (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) Cannot activate (automatic operation impossible, manual operation possible) Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_2 PLUL bit status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 7A and COL. 26 to check PLUL switch operation status and connection status Check HHT [1] INVERTER MENU FLOOR DATA absolute location information ER_PLDL_OFF When the automatic operation is stopped, there is no lowest floor check signal at the lowest floor (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) Cannot activate (automatic operation impossible, manual operation possible) Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_3 PLDL bit status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 7A and COL. 26 to check PLDL switch operation status and connection status Check HHT [1] INVERTER MENU FLOOR DATA absolute location information ER_UL&DL_OFF There is a landing sensor DZ signal, buy no UL and DL signal (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) Cannot activate (automatic operation impossible, manual operation possible, overall height measurement operation impossible) Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_3 DZ, DL, UL bit status Check CAR top part landing sensor operation status
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
64
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
65
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
66
67
68
69
70
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 80 / 90
ER_DZ_OFF There are landing sensor UL and DL signals, but no DZ signal (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) Cannot activate (automatic operation impossible, manual operation possible, overall height measurement operation impossible) Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_3 DZ, DL, UL bit status Check CAR top part landing sensor operation status ER_COMPEN SW CCS switch active Cannot activate Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_4 CCS bit status Check CCS switch status
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
71
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
72
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
73
74
75
76
77
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 81 / 90
ER_DINV COMM Door inverter communication problem (detection condition maintaining time : 3 sec) Cannot activate (automatic operation impossible, manual operation possible) Do not detect during automatic operation driving Check main board CAR CAN communication status LED(LED4, LED5) operation it is normal, it blinks with very short interval) Check CN11 connector CAN communication line(H, L) connection status Check door inverter operation status and communication line connection status ER_COP COMM
(When
COP board communication problem (detection condition maintaining time : 3 sec) cannot activate (automatic operation impossible, manual operation possible) Do not detect during automatic operation driving Check main board CAR CAN communication status LED(LED4, LED5) operation it is normal, it blinks with very short interval) Check CN11 connector CAN communication line(H, L) connection status Check COP board operation status and communication line connection status ER_DINV_ENCFLT Door inverter(CTC) encoder fault. cannot activate (automatic operation impossible, manual operation possible) Do not detect during automatic operation driving Check door inverter(CTC) and door encoder status ER_DINV_INIT Door inverter(CTC) was not initialized. cannot activate (automatic operation impossible, manual operation possible) Do not detect during automatic operation driving Check door inverter(CTC) status
(When
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
78
79
80
81
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
82
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
83
84
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 82 / 90
ER_GATE OPEN During driving, CAR door is opened (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) Emergency stop and cannot activate Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_2 GS bit status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 3A to check GS contact operation status Check CAR door interlock switch contact ER_HATCH OPEN During driving, floor door is opened (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) Emergency stop and cannot activate Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_1 DS bit status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 3A to check DS contact operation status Check each floor door interlock switch contact ER_DOOR INV Door inverter error occurred (detection condition maintaining time : 500 ms) Cannot activate (automatic operation impossible, manual operation possible) No detection during automatic operation driving Check door inverter operation status ER_GATE There is no GATE signal in floor door interlock signal and Close Limit signal operation status (detection condition maintaining time: 1 sec) Cannot activate Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_2 GS bit status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 3A to check GS contact operation status Check CAR door interlock switch contact
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
85
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions
86
Control action when disorder is detected Check points
87
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions
88
Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions
89
Control action when disorder is detected Check points
90
91
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 83 / 90
ER_HATCH During GATE interlock and DCL signal operation outside door zone, there is no HATCH interlock signal (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) Cannot activate Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_1 DS bit status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 3A to check DS contact operation status Check each floor door interlock switch contact ER_HATCH2 In automatic operation door zone section, during GATE interlock and DCL signal operation, there is no HATCH interlock signal (detection condition maintaining time : 4 sec) After opening the door, try to close it If the same error is repeated 3times, cannot activate Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_1 DS bit status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 3A to check DS contact operation status Check each floor door interlock switch contact ER_DOL&DCL ON DOL and DCL simultaneous operation (detection condition maintaining time: 2.5 sec) Cannot activate (automatic operation impossible, manual operation possible) No detection during automatic operation driving Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check DINV CAN DATA Fr_DINV1 DCL and DOL bit status Check CAR door Close Limit and Open Limit switch operation status ER_DOOR_JUMPER During CAR door open signal and DOL signal operation, floor door close signal operation (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) Cannot activate Maintain door open status and CLOSE operation impossible (DCB invalid), try re-open during Open Limit reset. Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_1 DS, GS bit status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 3A to check DS, GS contact jumper connection status and operation status ER_DS JUMPER During CAR door open signal and DOL signal operation, floor door close signal operation (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) Cannot activate Maintain door open status and CLOSE operation impossible (DCB invalid), try re-open during Open Limit reset. Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_1 DS bit status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 3A to check DS contact jumper connection status and operation status ER_DCL ON While CAR door and floor door are open, Door close limit signal operation (detection condition maintaining time: 1 sec) Cannot activate (automatic operation impossible, manual operation possible) No detection during automatic operation driving Check CAR door Close Limit switch operation status ER_MOTOR HEAT Motor overheated signal operation (detection condition maintaining time: 100ms) Stop at the nearest floor, and maintain cannot activate status for certain time period (manual operation possible) Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_1 MTR bit status (only for synchronizer) Check machine room temperature and motor temperature
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
92
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions
93
Control action when disorder is detected Check points
94
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
95
96
97
98
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 84 / 90
ER_DOOR CLOSE After door CLOSE output, there is no Door Close Limit signal for certain time (detection condition maintaining time : 8 sec) Repeat CLOSE output 3 times, and if there is still a problem, maintain door OPEN and cannot activate status Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check DINV CAN DATA Fr_DINV1 DCL bit status Check CAR door Close Limit switch operation status Check door inverter operation status ER_DOOR OPEN After door OPEN output, there is no Door Open Limit signal for certain time (detection condition maintaining time : 8 sec) Repeat OPEN output 3 times, and if there is still a problem, move to the nearest floor and try to open again. If error continues, return to the base floor, and try Open output 3times Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check DINV CAN DATA Fr_DINV1 DOL bit status Check CAR door Open Limit switch operation status Check door inverter operation status ER_INV POSI Main inverter location information error signal occurred (detection condition maintaining time : 500 ms) No location error detection during driving When it occurred while it was stopped: return to base floor (operation speed: 60 mpm) Check HHT [1] INVERTER MENU FLOOR DATA absolute location information Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 7A and COL. 26 to check the highest floor and the lowest floor checking switch operation status and connection status ER_BAD CALL If main inverter driving destination floor is deceleration impossible floor, (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms ) Stop at the nearest floor If there is call(Call) signal, operate normally Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check INVERTER DATA CALL_FLR status ER_NEAR STOP During driving nearest floor stop request signal occurred from main inverter (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) Stop at the nearest floor If there is call(Call) signal, operate normally Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check INVERTER DATA CALL_FLR status
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
99
100
101
102
103
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
104
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
105
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 85 / 90
ER_ULS RUN DN During DOWN direction driving, ULS operation (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) Normal operation Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_2 ULS bit status ER_DLS RUN UP During UP direction driving, DLS operation (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) Normal operation Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_2 DLS bit status ER_RUN_BY_SW RUN BY(RBL) switch active Normal operation(with Buzzer) Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_3 RBL bit status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 8B to check RNBY connection status and operation status ER_PLUL_OFF1 PLUL switch does not active at top floor Auto inspection drive to check absolute position Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_3 PLUL bit status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 7A to check PLUL connection status and operation status ER_PLDL_OFF1 PLDL switch does not active at bottom floor Auto inspection drive to check absolute position Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check GPIO DATA INPUT_3 PLDL bit status Refer to the electric circuit diagram COL. 7A to check PLDL connection status and operation status
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
106
107
108
109
110
111
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
112
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 86 / 90
ER_COP COM During automatic operation driving o manual operation. COP board communication problem occurred (detection condition maintaining time : 3 sec) Normal operation(for error monitoring) Check main board CAR CAN communication status LED(LED4, LED5) operation (When it is normal, it blinks with very short interval) Check CN11 connector CAN communication line(H, L) connection status Check COP board operation status and communication line connection status ER_DINV COM During automatic operation driving or manual operation, door inverter communication problem occurred (detection condition maintaining time: 3 sec) Normal operation(for error monitoring) Check main board CAR CAN communication status LED(LED4, LED5) operation (When it is normal, it blinks with very short interval) Check CN11 connector CAN communication line(H, L) connection status Check door inverter board operation status and communication line connection status
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
113
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
114
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
115
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
116
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
117
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
118
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
119
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 87 / 90
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
120
121
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions
122
Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions
123
Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions
124
Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions
125
Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions
126
Control action when disorder is detected Check points
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 88 / 90
ER_DR INV OC Door inverter over-current error occurred (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) For door inverter detail error monitoring If it occurred with door inverter error(ER_DOOR INV, error code 83), cannot activate(manual operation possible) Check door inverter operation status ER_DR INV OL Door inverter overload error occurred (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) For door inverter detail error monitoring If it occurred with door inverter error(ER_DOOR INV, error code 83), cannot activate(manual operation possible) Check door inverter operation status ER_DR INV OV Door inverter and voltage error occurred (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) For door inverter detail error monitoring If it occurred with door inverter error(ER_DOOR INV, error code 83), cannot activate(manual operation possible) Check door inverter operation status ER_DR INV UV Door inverter low voltage error occurred (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) For door inverter detail error monitoring If it occurred with door inverter error(ER_DOOR INV, error code 83), cannot activate(manual operation possible) Check door inverter operation status ER_DR INV VER Door inverter program version error occurred (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) For door inverter detail error monitoring If it occurred with door inverter error(ER_DOOR INV, error code 83), cannot activate(manual operation possible) Check door inverter operation status ER_DR INV DIR Door inverter dual direction (door open/close signals simultaneous operation) error occurred (detection condition maintaining time: 100 ms) For door inverter detail error monitoring If it occurred with door inverter error(ER_DOOR INV, error code 83), cannot activate(manual operation possible) Check door inverter operation status
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
127
128
129
130
131
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
132
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display)
133
Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 89 / 90
ER_SE Safety Edge long time operation
problem
(detection condition maintaining time : 5 min)
When nudging option is applied, after 30 sec., output buzzer and output door close t Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check DINV CAN DATA Fr_DINV1 SE bit status Check Safety Edge operation status ER_EE Multi beam or Safety Ray long time operation problem (detection condition maintaining time : 5 min) When nudging option is applied, after 30 sec., output buzzer and output door close Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check DINV CAN DATA Fr_DINV1 EE bit status Check Multi beam or Safety Ray operation status ER_OPEN BTN Door open button(DOB) long time operation problem 상 (detection condition maintaining time : 5 min) For error monitoring, door closing impossible occurred Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check COP CAN DATA Fr_COP1 DOB bit status Check door open button operation status and COP board connector connection status
WBVF E. TROUBLE SHOOTING MANUAL
134
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
135
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
136
137
138
139
140
Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points Disorder(LCD display) Disorder detecting conditions Control action when disorder is detected Check points
Doc. No Ver. Date Page
2.0 2014-05-30 90 / 90
ER_CLOSE BTN Door close button(DCB) long time operation problem (detection condition maintaining time : 5 min) For error monitoring Use HHT I/O SIGNAL menu to check COP CAN DATA Fr_COP1 DCB bit status Check door close button operation status and COP board connector connection status ER_HALL_COMM Hall side CAN communication error For error monitoring Use HHT I/O SIGNAL / HALL CAN DATA / HALL RX DATA to check HALL side CAN communication status
WBVF SERIES ELEVATOR MANUAL Sep. 2014 Revision 2
Hyundai Elevator Co.,Ltd. Head office & Factory San136-1, Ami-ri,Bubal-eud,Ichon-shi,Kyonggi-do,Korea P.C：467734 Tel：82-31-644-5114 Fax：82-2-745-4227
Seoul Office 1-83 Dongsoong-dong,Jongro-ku,Seoul,Korea P.C：11050 Tel：82-2-3670-0660 Fax：82-2-3672-8763/4
Shanghai Hyundai Elevator Mfg.Co.,Ltd. Head office & Factory No.182 Zhenxi (South)Liantang Town,Qinpu District, Shanghai,China P.C：201716 Tel：(021) 5981-3900 Fax：(021) 5981-3903
Shanghai Office 12 FL. new Caohejing International Business Center Building 2., No.391 Guiping Road, Shanghai,China P.C：200233 Tel：(021) 6485-8600/7030 Fax：(021) 6485-4953
Beijing Office Room#518,Gaolan Bldg.,No.32 Liangmaqiao Road Chaoyang District,Beijing,China P.C：100004 Tel：(010) 6464-3509 Fax：(010) 6464-3394